VW Passat b7 Electrical System Eng

Service
Workshop Manual
Passat 2011 ➤
Passat Variant 2011 ➤
Electrical system
Edition 03.2020
Service Department. Technical Information

Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups
Repair Group
00 - Technical data
27 - Starter, current supply, CCS
90 - Gauges, instruments
92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system
94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior
96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior
97 - Wiring
Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
Passat 2011 ➤ , Passat Variant 2011 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 03.2020
Contents
00 - Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
27 - Starter, current supply, CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1 Assembly overview - battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Assembly overview - pyrotechnic battery isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Disconnecting and connecting battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Removing and installing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.5 Checking battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.6 Charging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.7 Removing and installing battery isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.8 Adapting battery monitor control unit J367 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 Jump-start connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.1 Assembly overview - jump-start connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2 Removing and installing jump starting point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.1 Assembly overview - alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2 Removing and installing alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.3 Checking alternator with voltage regulator CX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.4 Repairing alternator with voltage regulator CX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5 Checking poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.6 Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.7 Removing and installing voltage regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4 Starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.1 Assembly overview – starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.2 Removing and installing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.3 Checking starter B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6 Start/stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.1 Components of start/stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.2 Removing and installing voltage stabiliser J532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7 Adaptive cruise control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.1 Components of adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.2 Overview of fitting locations - adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.3 Removing and installing adaptive cruise control button E357 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.4 Removing and installing adaptive cruise control unit J428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.5 Calibrating adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
90 - Gauges, instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1 Dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.1 Removing and installing dash panel insert K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.2 Multi-pin connector pin assignment on dash panel insert K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2.1 Removing and installing treble horn H2 , bass horn H7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2.2 Removing and installing horn plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

1 Windscreen wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.1 Assembly overview - windscreen wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.2 Removing and installing wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1.3 Removing and installing wiper arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1.4 Adjusting wiper arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Contents i
1.5 Renewing windscreen wiper rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

1.6 Removing and installing wiper motor V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.7 Deactivating APP function of wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
1.8 Removing and installing rain and light sensor G397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.1 Assembly overview - windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.2 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
2.3 Removing and installing washer pump V5 / windscreen and rear window washer pump V59
...................................................................... 120
2.4 Removing and installing windscreen washer fluid level sender G33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.5 Removing and installing washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2.6 Adjusting spray jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3 Rear window wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.1 Assembly overview - rear window wiper system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.2 Removing and installing wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.3 Removing and installing wiper arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.4 Adjusting wiper arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.5 Removing and installing rear window wiper motor V12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4 Rear window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.1 Assembly overview - rear window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.2 Removing and installing spray jet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.3 Adjusting spray jet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5 Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.1 Assembly overview - headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2 Removing and installing headlight washer system pump V11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.3 Removing and installing washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.4 Adjusting spray jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.5 Removing and installing pop-up cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6 Washer fluid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.1 Repairing washer fluid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

1 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
1.1 Assembly overview - headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
1.2 Removing and installing headlights MX1 / MX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
1.3 Adjusting headlights MX1 / MX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
1.4 Adjusting headlight installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
1.5 Removing and installing front turn signal bulb M5 / M7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1.6 Removing and installing headlight dipped beam bulb M29 / M31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1.7 Removing and installing headlight main beam bulb M30 / M32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
1.8 Removing and installing gas discharge bulb L13 / L14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
1.9 Removing and installing bulb for daytime running light/side light M1 / M3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1.10 Removing and installing headlight range control motor V48 / V49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
1.11 Installing repair kit for headlight housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1.12 Converting headlights from driving on right to driving on left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1.13 Converting headlights from driving on left to driving on right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1.14 Removing and installing swivel module position sensor G474 / G475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1.15 Removing and installing dynamic cornering light control motor V318 / V319 . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.16 Removing and installing gas discharge bulb control unit J343 / J344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.17 Removing and installing output module for headlight J667 / J668 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.1 Assembly overview - fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.2 Removing and installing fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.3 Removing and installing fog light bulb L22 / L23 , cornering light bulb L148 / L149 , daytime
running light bulb L174 / L175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ii Contents
2.4 Adjusting fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

3 Lights in exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.1 Assembly overview - lights in exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.2 Removing and installing entry light in exterior mirror W52 / W53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.3 Removing and installing turn signal repeater bulb L131 / L132 , entry light in exterior mirror
W52 / W53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.1 Assembly overview - tail lights in body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.2 Assembly overview - tail lights in rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.3 Removing and installing tail light MX3 / MX4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.4 Removing and installing tail light MX5 / MX6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.5 Removing and installing tail light cluster bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5 High-level brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.1 Removing and installing bulb for high-level brake light M25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6 Number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.1 Removing and installing number plate light X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.2 Removing and installing bulb for number plate light X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7 Entry and start authorisation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.1 Assembly overview - entry and start authorisation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.2 Removing and installing front door exterior handle central locking button E369 / E370 . . 204
7.3 Removing and installing rear door exterior handle central locking button E371 / E372 . . 207
7.4 Removing and installing interior aerial for entry and start authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.5 Removing and installing luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation R137
...................................................................... 214
7.6 Removing and installing rear bumper aerial for entry and start system R136 . . . . . . . . . . 215
7.7 Checking entry and start system aerials and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
7.8 Removing and installing rear lid power opening sender G750 / G760 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8 Steering column switch module (SCSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.1 Assembly overview - steering column switch module (SCSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.2 Removing and installing steering column switch module (SCSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.3 Removing and installing steering column electronics control unit J527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
9 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
9.1 Assembly overview – parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
9.2 Removing and installing parking aid control unit J446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.3 Removing and installing front parking aid warning buzzer H22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
9.4 Removing and installing rear parking aid warning buzzer H15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.5 Adjusting volume and frequency of rear parking aid warning buzzer H15 . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
9.6 Removing and installing front parking aid senders G252 / G253 / G254 / G255 . . . . . . . . 236
9.7 Removing and installing rear parking aid senders G203 / G204 / G205 / G206 . . . . . . . . 237
10 Park assist steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
10.1 Assembly overview - park assist steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
10.2 Removing and installing park assist steering control unit J791 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
10.3 Removing and installing front sender for park assist steering G568 / G569 . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
10.4 Removing and installing rear park assist steering sender G716 / G717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10.5 Removing and installing front parking aid warning buzzer H22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
10.6 Removing and installing park assist steering control unit J791 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
11 Automatic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
11.1 Removing and installing cornering light and headlight range control unit J745 . . . . . . . . 246
12 Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
12.1 Removing and installing trailer detector control unit J345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
13 Lane departure warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
13.1 Assembly overview - lane departure warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
13.2 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
13.3 Removing and installing front camera for driver assist systems R242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Contents iii
13.4 Removing and installing windscreen heater for front sensors Z113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

1 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - lights in dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
1.2 Overview of fitting locations - lights in front doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
1.3 Overview of fitting locations - lights in rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
1.4 Overview of fitting locations - lights in luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
1.5 Overview of fitting locations - lights in roof trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
1.6 Removing and installing glove compartment light W6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
1.7 Removing and installing bulb for glove compartment light W6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
1.8 Removing and installing footwell light W9 / W10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
1.9 Removing and installing footwell light bulb W9 / W10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
1.10 Removing and installing front passenger side airbag deactivated warning lamp K145 . . 262
1.11 Removing and installing Central locking SAFELOCK function warning lamp K133 . . . . . . 264
1.12 Removing and installing entry light W31 / W32 / W33 / W34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
1.13 Removing and installing cigarette lighter illumination bulb L28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1.14 Removing and installing luggage compartment light W3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1.15 Removing and installing bulb for luggage compartment light W3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
1.16 Removing and installing illuminated vanity mirror W20 / W14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
1.17 Removing and installing vanity mirror light bulb L31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
1.18 Removing and installing front interior light W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
1.19 Removing and installing centre reading light W39 / W40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
1.20 Removing and installing front interior light WX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
1.21 Removing and installing bulbs for front interior light W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
1.22 Removing and installing bulbs for centre reading light W39 / W40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
1.23 Removing and installing rear interior light W43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
1.24 Removing and installing rear reading light W11 / W12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
1.25 Removing and installing rear interior light WX2 , Saloon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
1.26 Removing and installing bulbs for rear reading light W11 / W12 , rear interior light W43 ,
Saloon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
1.27 Removing and installing rear reading light W11 / W12 , Estate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
1.28 Removing and installing bulb for rear reading light W11 / W12 , Estate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
2.1 Fitting locations overview - controls in dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
2.2 Fitting locations overview - controls in front doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
2.3 Overview of fitting locations - controls in rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
2.4 Overview of fitting locations - controls in centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
2.5 Fitting locations overview - controls in luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2.6 Fitting locations overview - controls in roof trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
2.7 Removing and installing light switch E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
2.8 Removing and installing switch and instrument illumination regulator E20 and headlight range
control regulator E102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2.9 Removing and installing electronic ignition lock D9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2.10 Removing and installing hazard warning light button E229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
2.11 Removing and installing glove compartment light switch E26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
2.12 Removing and installing key-operated switch to deactivate front passenger side airbag E224
...................................................................... 293
2.13 Removing and installing front driver side window regulator button E710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2.14 Removing and installing rear driver side window regulator button, in driver door E712 . . 294
2.15 Removing and installing front passenger side window regulator button, in driver door E715
...................................................................... 294
2.16 Removing and installing rear passenger side window regulator button, in driver door E714
........................................................................ 294
2.17 Removing and installing childproof lock button E318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2.18 Removing and installing driver side button module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2.19 Removing and installing mirror adjustment switch E43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
iv Contents
2.20 Removing and installing driver side interior locking button for central locking system E308
........................................................................ 297
2.21 Removing and installing rear lid remote release button E233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
2.22 Removing and installing window regulator switch in front passenger door E107 . . . . . . . . 299
2.23 Removing and installing rear window regulator button E711 / E713 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
2.24 Removing and installing electromechanical parking brake button E538 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.25 Removing and installing auto-hold button E540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.26 Removing and installing TCS and ESP button E256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.27 Removing and installing entry and start authorisation button E408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.28 Removing and installing shock absorber damping adjustment button E387 . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.29 Removing and installing Start/Stop operation button E693 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.30 Removing and installing rear roller blind switch E149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.31 Removing and installing tyre pressure monitor display button E492 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.32 Removing and installing parking aid button E266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.33 Removing and installing park assist steering button E581 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.34 Removing and installing switch module in centre console EX23 / EX30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.35 Removing and installing heated rear seat switch with regulator E128 / E129 . . . . . . . . . . 304
2.36 Removing and installing electric hinged tow coupling attachment button E474 . . . . . . . . 305
2.37 Removing and installing luggage compartment light switch F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
2.38 Removing and installing vanity mirror contact switch F147 / F148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
2.39 Removing and installing front interior light button E326 , reading light button E457 / E458
........................................................................ 307
2.40 Removing and installing sliding sunroof adjustment regulator E139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
2.41 Removing and installing garage door operating unit E284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
2.42 Removing and installing interior monitoring deactivation switch E267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
2.43 Removing and installing bonnet contact switch F266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
3 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
3.2 Removing and installing immobilizer reading unit D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
3.3 Immobiliser control unit J362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
3.4 Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
3.5 Online system test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.1 Assembly overview - anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.2 Activating and deactivating anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4.3 Removing and installing alarm horn H12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4.4 Removing and installing interior monitor send and receive module 1 G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
4.5 Removing and installing interior monitoring sensor G273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
4.6 Removing and installing vehicle inclination sender G384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
5 Lane change assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
5.1 Removing and installing lane change assist warning lamp in exterior mirror K233 / K234
........................................................................ 322
5.2 Removing and installing lane change assist control unit J769 / J770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
5.3 Calibrating lane change assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
5.4 Calibrating lane change assist control unit J769 / J770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
6 Cigarette lighter, sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
6.1 Removing and installing cigarette lighter U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
6.2 Removing and installing DC/AC converter with socket, 12 V-230 V U13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
1 Relay carriers, fuse holders, electronics boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
1.1 Removing and installing electronics box (E-box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
1.2 Removing and installing main fuse holder in electronics box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
1.3 Removing and installing dash panel fuse holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
1.4 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind dash panel on driver side . . . . . . . . 342
2 Select Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Contents v
2.1 Removing and installing onboard supply control unit J519 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
2.2 Removing and installing data bus diagnostic interface J533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
2.3 Removing and installing convenience system central control unit J393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
3.1 Repairing electrical wiring harnesses and plug-in connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
4 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and information systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
vi Contents
00 – Technical data
1
27 – Starter, current supply, CCS

1 Battery
(VRL014072; Edition 03.2020)
⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - battery”, page 2
⇒ “1.2 Assembly overview - pyrotechnic battery isolator”,
page 4
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and connecting battery”, page 4
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing battery”, page 9
⇒ “1.5 Checking battery”, page 16
⇒ “1.6 Charging battery”, page 16
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing battery isolator”, page 17
⇒ “1.8 Adapting battery monitor control unit J367”, page 19
1.1 Assembly overview - battery
Note
Depending on the level of equipment or the market, the starter

battery is on the left in the luggage compartment in some vehi‐
cles .
2 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

1 - Earth wire battery terminal

clamp
❑ Comply with the instruc‐
tions regarding threa‐
ded connections of the
battery terminals
⇒ page 4 .
❑ Vehicles with a start/
stop system also have a
battery monitoring con‐
trol unit - J367- (battery
sensor) connected to
the battery terminal of
the earth cable. Ob‐
serve notes
⇒ page 4 .
2 - Securing nut for earth wire
battery terminal clamp
❑ M6
❑ 6 Nm
3 - Positive wire battery termi‐
nal clamp
❑ Comply with the instruc‐
tions regarding threa‐
ded connections of the
battery terminals
⇒ page 4 .
4 - Securing nut for positive
wire battery terminal clamp
❑ M6
❑ 6 Nm
5 - Battery
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting battery in en‐
gine compartment
⇒ page 4
❑ Disconnecting and connecting battery in luggage compartment ⇒ page 4
6 - Securing bracket/clamping plate
7 - Securing bolt
❑ M8
❑ 20 Nm
1. Battery 3
1.2 Assembly overview - pyrotechnic bat‐

tery isolator
1 - Connector on pyrotechnical battery isolator
2 - Securing nut (collar nut) for B+ cable and pyrotechnical battery
isolator in main fuse box (15 Nm)
3 - B+ wire
4 - Pyrotechnical battery isolator
5 - Securing nut (self-locking) for pyrotechnic battery isolator in
main fuse box (15 Nm)
Note
If the battery isolator has triggered, the pyrotechnical battery iso‐

lator must be renewed.
1.3 Disconnecting and connecting battery

⇒ “1.3.1 Disconnecting and connecting battery, in engine com‐
partment”, page 4
⇒ “1.3.2 Disconnecting and connecting battery, in luggage com‐
partment”, page 7
Note
♦ Depending on the level of equipment or the market, the starter

battery is on the left in the luggage compartment in some ve‐
hicles .
♦ Recharging or jump starting vehicles with Start/Stop system:
When recharging or jump starting vehicles with Start/Stop sys‐
tem, note the following: using charging cable, first connect
positive terminals, then body earth. This ensures that the bat‐
tery monitor control unit - J367- (battery sensor) is not bridged.
The direct charging of the battery on the negative terminal
clamp shunts current around the battery sensor. The battery
data are not registered by the sensor while charging. The val‐
ues concerning the battery state saved in the data bus diag‐
nostic interface do not then correspond to the values of the
charged battery.
1.3.1 Disconnecting and connecting battery,

in engine compartment
WARNING
Danger of injury! Comply with the warning notices and safety

regulations!
Special tools and workshop equipment required

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-
Note
♦ Disconnecting the battery involves deactivating the anti-theft

coding
⇒ “4.2 Activating and deactivating anti-theft alarm”,
page 315 .
♦ Disconnecting the battery earth cable (open circuit) ensures
safety when working on the electrical system. Disconnecting
the battery positive cable is required only for removal of the
battery. However, you should in any case observe the notes
on connecting the battery ⇒ page 4 .
hicles ⇒ page 7 .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.

– Disengage ignition key in position 0 (locked).
Connecting battery on vehicles with battery housing:
– Open locking device -arrow- and remove battery housing cov‐
er.
Disconnecting battery on vehicles with battery protective jacket:
– Open cover -1- of battery protective jacket.

Continued for all vehicles:
1. Battery 5
– First, undo the clamping bolt -1- and pull battery terminal
clamp of earth cable off battery negative terminal.
clamp of positive cable off battery positive terminal.
Connecting battery
Caution
All the instructions and information for battery terminal con‐

nection can be found in the workshop manual “Electrical Sys‐
tem, General Information”. A link to this workshop manual is
not possible at present for technical reasons. Select the work‐
shop manual “Electrical System, General Information” man‐
ually in ELSA.
Note
After the battery has been reconnected and the ignition is switch‐
ed on, the ESP and TCS warning lamp - K155- and electrome‐
chanical power steering warning lamp will light up permanently.
The warning lamps will go out automatically when the vehicle is
driven at 15 to 20 km/h in a straight line. This has effect of reac‐
tivating steering angle sender - G85- .

– Fit positive cable battery terminal clamp onto battery positive

terminal.
– Tighten clamp bolt -2- to torque specified in assembly over‐
view ⇒ page 2 .
– Fit positive earth cable battery terminal clamp onto battery
negative terminal.
view ⇒ page 2 .
– Put cover on battery housing and lock it into place.
– Work through steps listed in table after connecting.
Procedures after reconnecting battery:
Procedure Performed
Switch ignition on and off again
using ignition key.
– Read event memory: ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester.
.
Check time on clock and
change as necessary.
Window regulators:
– Open and close all windows
as far as they will go.
– Finally, when window is

closed, pull the window reg‐
ulator button until the relay
audibly switches.
– Check convenience mode

of the window regulators.
The window must close fully
in the convenience mode,
without holding the switch.
Radio or radio and navigation
system:
Check function, recode radio if
necessary
Functional check: check all
electrical consumers.
Table can be printed out if necessary.
1.3.2 Disconnecting and connecting battery,

in luggage compartment
WARNING

regulations!
1. Battery 7
Disconnecting battery
Note
♦ Disconnecting the battery involves deactivating the anti-theft

coding
⇒ “4.2 Activating and deactivating anti-theft alarm”,
page 315 .
♦ Disconnecting the battery earth cable (open circuit) ensures
safety when working on the electrical system. Disconnecting
the battery positive cable is required only for removal of the
battery. However, you should in any case observe the notes
on connecting the battery ⇒ page 4 .

– Open cover in left side-panel trim and remove storage com‐
partment.
clamp of earth cable off battery negative terminal.
– Then, open terminal cover -arrow- of battery positive terminal.
clamp of positive cable off battery positive terminal.
Connecting battery
Caution

ually in ELSA.
Note
Positive wire battery clamp must be turned in direction of travel.

– Fit positive cable battery terminal clamp onto battery positive

terminal.
view ⇒ page 2 .
– Close terminal cover -arrow-.
– Fit positive earth cable battery terminal clamp onto battery
negative terminal.
view ⇒ page 2 .
– Insert storage compartment or cover of luggage compartment
trim and lock it.
– Work through steps listed in table after connecting.
Procedures after reconnecting battery:
Procedure Performed
Switch ignition on and off again
using ignition key.
– Read event memory: ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester.
.
Check time on clock and
change as necessary.
Window regulators:
– Open and close all windows
as far as they will go.
– Finally, when window is

closed, pull the window reg‐
ulator button until the relay
audibly switches.
– Check convenience mode

of the window regulators.
The window must close fully
in the convenience mode,
without holding the switch.
Radio or radio and navigation
system:
Check function, recode radio if
necessary
Functional check: check all
electrical consumers.
1.4 Removing and installing battery

⇒ “1.4.1 Removing and installing battery, in engine compartment,
petrol engine”, page 10
⇒ “1.4.2 Removing and installing battery, in engine compartment,
diesel engine”, page 12
⇒ “1.4.3 Removing and installing battery, in luggage compart‐
ment”, page 14
1. Battery 9
1.4.1 Removing and installing battery, in en‐

gine compartment, petrol engine
WARNING

regulations!
Caution

ually in ELSA.

Replacing battery on vehicles with start/stop system:

Because of its higher deep-cycle resistance, only a special starter
battery is used in vehicles with a start/stop system.
When renewing the starter battery, note correct part designation
in ⇒ ETKA . Starter batteries for use in vehicles with a start/stop
system are marked with “AGM” (Absorbent Glass Mat) or
“EFB” (Enhanced Flooded Battery).
Note
♦ The battery parametrisation must be performed after installing

a new starter battery on vehicles with a battery sensor.
♦ The battery parametrisation sends the technical data of the
new battery to the battery monitor.
♦ Perform battery parametrisation ⇒ page 19 .
Removing:
– Disconnect battery ⇒ page 4 .

– Depending on equipment, pull either panel of battery housing

or fleece bag upwards in direction of -arrow- off battery.
– Unscrew securing bolt -1- and remove clamping plate -2-.
– Fold handles -arrows- upwards and remove battery.

Installing:
Caution
A loosely fitted battery creates the following dangers:

♦ Shortened service life caused by vibration damage (dan‐
ger of explosion).
♦ The plates in the battery cells will be damaged if the bat‐
tery is not secured correctly.
♦ Damage to battery housing by securing bracket/clamping
plate (possibility of acid leaking, with high consequential
costs)
♦ Poor crash safety.
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐

serve the following:
– Tighten all threaded connections to torque specified in as‐
sembly overview ⇒ page 2 .
– After installing battery, check it is firmly seated.
– Connect battery ⇒ page 4 .
1. Battery 11
1.4.2 Removing and installing battery, in en‐

gine compartment, diesel engine
WARNING

regulations!
Caution

ually in ELSA.

♦ Pliers for spring-type clips - VAS 5024A-


Note

Removing:
– Remove air filter housing ⇒ Rep. gr. 23 ; Air filter; Removing
and installing air filter housing
– Depending on equipment, pull either panel of battery housing
or fleece bag upwards in direction of -arrow- off battery.
– Unscrew securing bolt -1- and remove clamping plate -2-.
1. Battery 13
– Open handles -arrows- upwards and remove battery.

Installing:
Caution

ger of explosion).
costs)

1.4.3 Removing and installing battery, in lug‐

gage compartment
WARNING

regulations!
Caution

ually in ELSA.



Note

hicles .
Removing:
– Pull hose for central venting -arrow- off battery.
– Undo bolt -1- and remove securing bracket -2-.
1. Battery 15
– Open handles -arrows- upwards and remove battery.

Installing:
Caution

ger of explosion).
costs)

– Tighten bolt of securing bracket to torque specified in assem‐
bly overview ⇒ page 2 .
Note
♦ When installing batteries with a hose for central venting, en‐

sure that the hose is not pinched. Only then can the battery
vent freely.
♦ Ensure that the central gas venting hose -1- is inserted into
the rubber grommet -2-.
♦ Ensure that the opening on the upper side of the battery cover
is not blocked on batteries without a hose for central venting.
1.5 Checking battery

Check battery ⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep. gr.
27 ; Checking battery .
1.6 Charging battery

Charging battery ⇒ Electrical system, General information; Rep.
gr. 27 ; Charging battery .

1.7 Removing and installing battery isolator
WARNING
♦ Battery isolator improves crash safety on vehicles with

battery installed in luggage compartment. In an accident,
the airbag control unit triggers a charge disconnecting the
voltage supply cable to the starter. Battery isolation is per‐
formed pyrotechnically, with a very small explosive
charge. To ensure that you do not trigger the charge in‐
advertently when working on the battery or the battery
isolator, you must first unscrew the negative terminal
clamp ⇒ page 4 .
♦ Observe safety precautions when your are working on
battery isolator ⇒ page 17 .
♦ Comply with the instructions regarding the disposal of bat‐
tery isolating units ⇒ page 18 .
Depending on equipment, the pyrotechnical battery isolator is in‐

stalled in the luggage compartment, in conjunction with starter
battery. The isolator is integrated into the main fuse box. The main
fuse box is located in the luggage compartment, on the left above
the battery.
Safety precautions when working on pyrotechnical battery isola‐
tor
WARNING
♦ Testing, removing, installing and repair work may only be

performed by qualified personnel.
♦ When work is performed on the battery isolator, the battery
earth cable must be disconnected.
♦ Before touching the battery isolator, the mechanic must
electrostatically discharge himself. This can be done by
touching a piece of earthed metal such as a water pipe, a
heating pipe or metal girders.
♦ The battery isolation unit should be installed immediately
after it is removed from its transportation packaging.
♦ If the work is interrupted, the battery isolation unit should
again be placed in its transportation packaging.
♦ Battery isolation units must not be left lying unattended.
♦ Battery isolation units which have dropped onto a hard
surface or show signs of damage must not be installed.
♦ The storage and transportation complies with the legisla‐
tion for explosive substances.
1. Battery 17
Disposal of pyrotechnical battery isolation units
WARNING
♦ Non triggered battery isolation units must be disposed of

in their original packaging and by an authorised authority
according to national legislation. All enquires must be di‐
rected to the respective distribution centre or importer.
♦ Triggered battery isolation units can be disposed of
through industrial waste system.
Removing:
WARNING
♦ Observe safety precautions when your are working on

battery isolator ⇒ page 17 .
♦ Comply with the instructions regarding the disposal of bat‐
tery isolating units ⇒ page 18 .


– Disconnect battery in luggage compartment ⇒ page 7 .
– Open fasteners of main fuse box -1- by turning them 90° to left
and open cover downwards.

– Unbolt flanged nut -1- and detach battery positive cable -2-
from connection thread.
– Unscrew self-locking nut -4- and remove pyrotechnical battery
isolator -3- from connection threads. Take cable length into
consideration while removing battery isolator.
– Release connector -1- by pulling primary locking mechanism

-3- in direction of arrow.
– Pull off connector -1- in direction of arrow and remove pyro‐
technic battery isolator -2- from vehicle.
Installing:
Note
When attaching connector to pyrotechnical battery isolator, make

sure that the connector engages audibly and that the primary
locking mechanism is pressed in again.
– Tighten nut of B+ wire at main fuse box -1- to 15 Nm.

– Tighten securing nut (self-locking) -4- of pyrotechnical battery
isolator at main fuse box to 15 Nm.
– Connect battery in luggage compartment ⇒ page 7 .
1.8 Adapting battery monitor control unit

J367
After the installation of a new starter battery or a new battery
monitor control unit - J367- , the battery monitor control unit -
J367- must be adapted.
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Adapt battery monitor control unit - J367- .
1. Battery 19
2 Jump-start connection
⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview - jump-start connection”, page 20
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing jump starting point”, page 20
2.1 Assembly overview - jump-start connec‐

tion
Note
Vehicles with the battery in the luggage compartment have an

additional jump start point on the left in the engine compartment.
This consists of the terminal 30 wiring junction - TV2- and the
suppression filter - C24- .
1 - Suppression filter - C24-

2 - Jump-start connection
3 - Securing nut (collar nut) for term. 30 line to starter - B- and to
threaded connection (30) on electronics box
4 - Securing nut (flange nut) for term. 30 line from igniter for bat‐
tery isolator - N253- in the luggage compartment, on the right
5 - Term. 30 line from battery isolation igniter - N253- in the lug‐
gage compartment, on the right
6 - Terminal 30 line to starter - B- and to threaded connection (30)
on E-box
7 - Connector for suppression filter - C24-
8 - Securing bolt
2.2 Removing and installing jump starting

point
Note
Vehicles with the battery in the luggage compartment have an

additional jump start point on the left in the engine compartment.
This consists of the terminal 30 wiring junction - TV2- and the
suppression filter - C24- .


Removing:
Note
♦ For reasons of clarity, the air filter housing has been removed
in the following illustrations.
♦ It is not necessary to remove the air filter housing in order to
remove or install the jump starting point with suppression filter.
– Release retaining clip -arrow A- and open cover -1- above the
positive terminal grip.
– Release cover -2- above electric cables and open it in
-direction of arrow B-.
– Undo nuts -5- and -6- and remove positive cables from con‐
nection threads.
– Detach electrical connector -1- from suppression filter -4-.
– Unscrew securing bolt -3- and remove positive terminal handle
-2- together with suppression filter from the bracket.
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Tighten nuts -5- and -6- to 15 Nm.

– Tighten securing bolt -3- to 9 Nm.
2. Jump-start connection 21
3 Alternator
Caution
To disconnect and reconnect the battery, the procedure de‐

scribed in the workshop manual should be strictly adhered to
⇒ page 4 .
⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview - alternator”, page 22

⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing alternator”, page 28
⇒ “3.3 Checking alternator with voltage regulator CX1 ”,
page 48
⇒ “3.4 Repairing alternator with voltage regulator CX1 ”,
page 48
⇒ “3.5 Checking poly V-belt”, page 49
⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley”, page 49
⇒ “3.7 Removing and installing voltage regulator”, page 54
3.1 Assembly overview - alternator

⇒ “3.1.1 Assembly overview - alternator with voltage regulator,
1.4 l TDI engine, 90/110 kW”, page 22
1.8 l TSI engine, 118 kW”, page 24
1.6 l TDI engine, 77 kW”, page 25
2.0 l TDI engine, 103/125 kW”, page 26
2.0 l TSI engine, 155 KW”, page 27
3.6 l TSI engine, 220 KW”, page 28
3.1.1 Assembly overview - alternator with voltage regulator, 1.4 l TDI engine,
90/110 kW

1 - Hexagon bolt with washer

and threaded element
❑ M4 x 20, M4 x 15
❑ 2 Nm
2 - Protective cap for alternator
3 - Cross-head bolts
❑ M4 x 20
❑ 2 Nm
4 - Protective cap for carbon
brushes
5 - Voltage regulator
❑ Removing and installing
voltage regulator
⇒ page 54
6 - Alternator with voltage reg‐
ulator - CX1-
alternator ⇒ page 29
❑ Checking alternator
⇒ page 48
❑ Securing B+ wire to al‐
ternator ⇒ page 48
poly V-belt pulley on al‐
7 - Poly V-belt
❑ Poly V-belt routing ⇒
Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder
block, belt pulley end;
Assembly overview -
poly V-belt drive .
❑ Checking poly V-belt
⇒ page 49
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info
8 - Hexagon head flange bolts
❑ M8 x 90
❑ 20 Nm
Not illustrated:
♦ M5 securing nut on back of alternator for wiring clamp - 3.2 Nm
♦ M8 securing bolts of air conditioner compressor on ancillary
bracket - 23 Nm
3. Alternator 23
3.1.2 Assembly overview - alternator with voltage regulator, 1.8 l TSI engine, 118
kW
1 - Hexagon head flange bolt

❑ M8x110
❑ 20 Nm
❑ M4x19
❑ 2 Nm
3 - Washer
❑ M5
4 - Cross-head screw
❑ M5x21
❑ 4.5 Nm
5 - Hexagon nut
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
6 - Hexagon nut, flat
❑ M8
❑ M4x13
❑ 2 Nm
voltage regulator
⇒ page 54
10 - Alternator with voltage
regulator - CX1-
⇒ page 48
❑ Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley ⇒ page 49
11 - Poly V-belt
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder block, pulley end; Removing and installing poly V-belt
❑ Checking ⇒ page 49
❑ Poly V-belt routing ⇒ Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder block, belt pulley end; Assembly overview - poly V-belt drive .

3.1.3 Assembly overview - alternator with voltage regulator, 1.6 l TDI engine, 77
kW

❑ M4 x 20, M4 x 15
❑ 2 Nm
❑ M4 x 20
❑ 2 Nm
brushes
voltage regulator
⇒ page 54
ulator - CX1-
⇒ page 48
7 - Poly V-belt
Assembly overview -
poly V-belt drive .
⇒ page 49
❑ M8 x 90
❑ 20 Nm
Not illustrated:
bracket - 23 Nm
3. Alternator 25
3.1.4 Assembly overview - alternator with voltage regulator, 2.0 l TDI engine,
103/125 kW

❑ M4 x 20, M4 x 15
❑ 2 Nm
❑ M4 x 20
❑ 2 Nm
brushes
voltage regulator
⇒ page 54
ulator - CX1-
⇒ page 48
7 - Poly V-belt
Assembly overview -
poly V-belt drive .
⇒ page 49
❑ M8 x 90
❑ 20 Nm
Not illustrated
bracket - 23 Nm

3.1.5 Assembly overview - alternator with voltage regulator, 2.0 l TSI engine,
155 KW
1 - Hexagon head flange bolt

❑ M8x110
❑ 20 Nm
❑ M4x19
❑ 2 Nm
3 - Washer
❑ M5
❑ M5x21
❑ 4.5 Nm
5 - Hexagon nut
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
6 - Hexagon nut, flat
❑ M8
❑ M4x13
❑ 2 Nm
voltage regulator
⇒ page 54
10 - Alternator with voltage
regulator - CX1-
⇒ page 48
❑ Securing B+ wire to alternator ⇒ page 48
❑ Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley ⇒ page 49
11 - Poly V-belt
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder block, pulley end; Removing and installing poly V-belt
❑ Poly V-belt routing ⇒ Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder block, belt pulley end; Assembly overview - poly V-belt drive .
Not illustrated
♦ B+ wire 20 Nm
♦ Pulley to alternator 80 Nm
3. Alternator 27
3.1.6 Assembly overview - alternator with voltage regulator, 3.6 l TSI engine, 220
KW

❑ M4 x 20, M4 x 15
❑ 2 Nm
❑ Wiring retainer on alter‐
nator
❑ M5
❑ 3 Nm
❑ M4 x 20
❑ 2 Nm
brushes
voltage regulator
⇒ page 54
ulator - CX1-
7 - Poly V-belt
⇒ Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder
block, pulley end; Re‐
moving and installing
poly V-belt
block, belt pulley end; Assembly overview - poly V-belt drive .
❑ M8 x 90
❑ 20 Nm
3.2 Removing and installing alternator

⇒ “3.2.1 Removing and installing alternator with voltage regulator
CX1 , 1.4 l TDI engine, 90/110 kW”, page 29
CX1 , 1.8 l TSI engine, 118 kW”, page 31
CX1 , 1.6 l TDI engine, 77 kW”, page 34
CX1 , 2.0 l TDI engine, 103/125 kW”, page 36
CX1 , 2.0 l TSI engine, 155 KW”, page 40


CX1 , 3.6 l TSI engine, 220 kW”, page 44
3.2.1 Removing and installing alternator with

voltage regulator - CX1- , 1.4 l TDI en‐
gine, 90/110 kW
Removing:
– Remove poly V-belt ⇒ Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder block, pulley end;
Removing and installing poly V-belt .
– Remove upper alternator securing bolt -arrow-.
– Remove noise insulation ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66 ; Noise insulation; Removing and installing noise
insulation .
– Unbolt cable retainer -2- and remove protective cap -1-.
3. Alternator 29
– Unlock and disconnect connector of DF cable -1-.

– Undo nut -2- and detach the B+ wire under it from the con‐
nection thread.
– Unscrew securing bolts of air conditioner compressor

-arrows-.
– Release and disconnect connector -1-.

– Undo the third bolt -arrow- and remove air conditioner com‐
pressor from bracket.
Note
♦ The hoses of the air conditioner compressor can remain con‐

nected.
♦ Suspend the air conditioner compressor -3- using a piece of
wire -1- at a suitable position beneath the vehicle until it is
ready to be reinstalled.
♦ Ensure that the hoses -2- are not stretched or kinked.

– Remove bottom alternator securing bolt -arrow-.

– Remove alternator downwards from vehicle.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
Caution
♦ When installing used poly V-belts observe the direction of

rotation marked on removal!
♦ Before installing poly V-belt, make sure that all ancillaries
(alternator, air conditioner compressor) are firmly se‐
cured.
♦ When fitting belt, ensure that poly V-belt seats correctly in
pulleys!
– Drive threaded sleeves -A- approx. 4 mm in

-direction of arrow- out of alternator housing.
– Secure cable retainer -arrow- on back of alternator in 9 o'clock

position.
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torque given in as‐
– Start engine and check belt running.

voltage regulator - CX1- , 1.8 l TSI en‐
gine, 118 kW
Caution
When batteries are disconnected and reconnected, the proce‐

dure described in the workshop manual must be strictly ob‐
served ⇒ page 4 .
3. Alternator 31
Removing:
Caution
Prior to removal, mark top side and direction of rotation of poly

V-belt. When installing, ensure correct fitting position and di‐
rection of rotation. If the belt is installed in the wrong position
or against direction of rotation, the belt will be destroyed!

– Release and disconnect connectors -2- and -3-.
– Undo screws of oil pressure switch -1- and -4- and remove.
– Unscrew and remove 4 securing bolts -arrows- of alternator.
– Swing alternator slightly to the left to gain access to connec‐
tions on generator side.
– Unlock and separate connector of DF cable -1-.

– Lever off protective cap -1-.
– Undo nut -2- and detach the B+ wire -1- under it from the con‐
nection thread of the alternator.
– Remove both securing bolts -arrows- and push pipes and hose
-1- up to make room for removing the alternator.
Note
Pipework and hose can remain connected.
– Remove alternator by taking it upwards out of the vehicle.

Installing:
following:
Caution

cured.
pulleys!

3. Alternator 33

gine, 77 kW
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .

Removing:
– Pull engine cover off upwards -arrows-.
– Move lock carrier to service position ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Lock carrier; Service position .
Caution



– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- of air conditioner compres‐

sor.
Note

nected.
♦ Suspend the air conditioner compressor using a piece of wire
at a suitable position until it is ready to be reinstalled.
♦ Ensure that the hoses are not stretched or kinked.

necting thread of the alternator.
– Undo nuts -3- and remove cable retainer -2- from alternator.
– Remove both securing bolts -1-.

– Unscrew securing nut -2- and lay fuel filter -3- to side. The fuel
hoses can then remain connected.
3. Alternator 35
– Undo and remove the two bolts -arrows- securing the alterna‐
tor.
Installing:
following:
Caution

cured.
pulleys!
– Drive threaded sleeves -A- about 4 mm in direction of arrow

out of alternator housing.
– Tighten wiring retainer -arrow- on back of alternator in 3 o'clock

position.
Caution

⇒ page 4 .


gine, 103/125 kW
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .


♦ Locking pin - T10060 A-
Removing:
– Pull engine cover off upwards -arrows-.
– Move lock carrier to service position ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Lock carrier; Service position .
Caution


insulation .
3. Alternator 37
– Unscrew both securing bolts -1- and securing nut -2- and place
fuel filter -3- to one side. The fuel hoses can then remain con‐
nected.
– Unscrew upper securing bolt -2- of alternator.
– Open lower spring-type clip -1-.
– Tilt alternator -3- forwards.

necting thread of the alternator.
– Undo securing nuts -4- and remove cable bracket from alter‐
nator.

– Unscrew lower securing bolt -1- of alternator.

Installing:
following:
Caution

cured.
pulleys!
– Drive threaded sleeves -A- about 4 mm in direction of arrow

out of alternator housing.
– Tighten wiring retainer -arrow- on back of alternator in 3 o'clock

position.
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .

– Switch off engine.
3. Alternator 39

gine, 155 KW
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .
Special tools and workshop

equipment required

♦ Pliers for spring-type clips - VAS 5024 A-
Removing:

– Detach connector -arrow-.
– Loosen spring-type clip -arrow- using spring-type clip pliers -

VAS 5024 A- .
– Remove securing bolts -arrows-.

– Remove charge air hose from vehicle.
– Loosen clip -1- and pull hose -2- off activated charcoal filter.
Note
For reasons of clarity, the activated charcoal filter bracket is

shown removed in the following illustration. To release filter,
bracket must not be removed.
3. Alternator 41
– Slightly lift up the locking lug on the backside of the bracket

-arrow- using a suitable screwdriver.
– Pull activated charcoal filter -1- upwards out of bracket -2-.
– Place activated charcoal filter container -1- with connected
hose to one side.
Caution

– Remove poly V-belt ⇒ Rep. gr. 13 ; Cylinder block on pulley

side; Removing and installing poly V-belt .
– Remove both securing bolts -arrows- and push coolant pipes

and hose -1- up to make room for removing the alternator.
Note
Coolant pipes and hose can remain connected.

insulation .
– Unscrew securing bolts of air conditioner compressor

-arrows-.
– Unfasten connector -1- and disconnect.

– Undo the third bolt -arrow- and remove air conditioner com‐
pressor from bracket.

Note

nected.
♦ Suspend the air conditioner compressor -3- using a piece of
wire -1- at a suitable position beneath the vehicle until it is
ready to be reinstalled.
♦ Ensure that the hoses -2- are not stretched or kinked.
– Unscrew both lower securing bolts -arrows- for alternator from

below.

– Unscrew both upper securing bolts -arrows- for alternator.
– Swing alternator slightly to the left to gain access to connec‐
tions on generator side.
– Unlock and separate connector of DF cable -1-.
3. Alternator 43
– Unscrew securing nut -2-.

– Remove underlying battery positive cable -1- from connection
threads of alternator.
Installing:
following:
Caution

cured.
pulleys!
– Tighten threaded connections to torque specified in assembly

overview ⇒ page 27 .
Caution
Comply with the instructions regarding threaded connections

of the battery terminals ⇒ page 4 .


gine, 220 kW
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .


Removing:
insulation .
– Remove front right part of wheel housing liner ⇒ General body
repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner; Removing
and installing wheel housing liner .
Caution

– Mark direction of poly V-belt travel.

– Release poly V-belt tension by levering back tensioning device
in -direction of arrow- using a 16 mm open-end spanner.
3. Alternator 45
– Lock tensioning element -2- using locking pin - T10060 A-

-1-.
– Remove poly V-belt.
– Remove air conditioner compressor and secure to body with
suitable material (e.g. welding wire) ⇒ Heating, air condition‐
ing; Rep. gr. 87 ; Air conditioning compressor; Removing and
installing air conditioning compressor from and to bracket .
– Unscrew securing nut -arrow- from cable retainer.
– Release and disconnect connector -2- from terminal 61.

– Pull off protective cap -1-.
– Open retainer -3- and remove cable from retainer.

– Unscrew securing nut -1- for battery positive cable -2- from
alternator and lay battery positive cable to side.
– Unscrew securing bolt -1- for tensioning roller -2- and remove
tensioning roller.
– Undo bolts securing alternator -arrows-.

– Remove alternator downwards from vehicle.
Installing:
following:
Caution

cured.
pulleys!
3. Alternator 47
– Drive threaded sleeves -A- approx. 4 mm in

-direction of arrow- out of alternator housing.
– Secure cable retainer -arrow- on back of alternator in 9 o'clock

position.
– Tighten threaded connections to specified torques
⇒ page 28 .
Caution
Comply with the instructions regarding threaded connections

of the battery terminals ⇒ page 4 .

3.3 Checking alternator with voltage regula‐

tor - CX1-
Note
Checking alternator ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault find‐

ing and Fitting locations .
– ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
3.4 Repairing alternator with voltage regu‐

lator - CX1-
Securing battery positive cable on alternator with voltage regula‐
tor - CX1-
Caution
If the battery positive wire is not tightened to the specified tor‐

que, there is a risk of the following:
♦ The battery will not be charged fully.
♦ Vehicle electrics or electronics fail completely (break‐
down).
♦ Danger of fires from sparks
♦ Damage to electronic components and control units due
to excessive voltage

– Tighten B+ wire -arrow- securing nut to 15 Nm.
3.5 Checking poly V-belt

– Use a socket spanner to turn engine at vibration damper on
pulley.
– Check poly V-belt for:
♦ Sub-surface cracks (cracks, core ruptures, cross sectional
breaks)
♦ Layer separation (top layer, cord strands)
♦ Eruptions on bottom cover
♦ Fraying of carcass
♦ Flank wear (material wear, frayed flanks, flank brittleness -
glassy flanks-, surface cracks)
♦ Oil and grease marks
Caution
If faults are found, it is essential for the poly V-belt to be re‐

newed. This will avoid potential breakdowns or operating prob‐
lems.
3.6 Removing and installing poly V-belt pul‐

ley
⇒ “3.6.1 Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley, without free‐
wheel”, page 49
⇒ “3.6.2 Removing and installing Bosch poly V-belt pulley, with
freewheel”, page 50
⇒ “3.6.3 Removing and installing Valeo poly V-belt pulley, with
freewheel”, page 52
3.6.1 Removing and installing poly V-belt pul‐

ley, without freewheel
3. Alternator 49
♦ Socket insert - VAS 3310-
Removing:
– Remove alternator ⇒ page 22 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing point.
– Use socket - VAS 3310- to unscrew poly V-belt pulley securing
nut from alternator shaft.
Installing:
– Tighten threaded connection to 65 Nm.
3.6.2 Removing and installing Bosch poly V-

belt pulley, with freewheel

♦ Multipoint adapter - VAS 3400-
Removing:
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap from poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
– Insert multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- with 17 mm ring span‐
ner in poly V-belt pulley with freewheel of alternator.
– Insert M10 multi-point bit -1- into alternator shaft.
– Undo bolted connection by turning it clockwise and counter‐
hold with ring spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel stationary by hand and
turn input shaft of alternator until poly V-belt pulley with free‐
wheel can be removed.
Installing:
following:
– First screw poly V-belt pulley with freewheel on drive shaft of
alternator by hand as far as limit stop.
The torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- must be modified for assembly
of poly V-belt with freewheel as follows:
3. Alternator 51
– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.

– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.
– Insert M10 multi-point bit -1- into alternator shaft.

– Counterhold multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- using 17 mm ring
spanner.
– Tighten poly V-belt with freewheel by turning drive shaft of al‐
ternator anti-clockwise using torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- .
– Tighten threaded connection to 80 Nm.
3.6.3 Removing and installing Valeo poly V-belt pulley, with freewheel


equipment required
♦ Multipoint adapter - VAS 3400-

♦ TORX driver bit - V.A.G 1603/1-
Removing:
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap from poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
– Insert multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- with 17 mm ring span‐
ner in poly V-belt pulley with freewheel of alternator.
3. Alternator 53
– Insert TORX driver bit - V.A.G 1603/1- into alternator shaft.

– Undo bolted connection by turning it clockwise and counter‐
hold with ring spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel stationary by hand and
turn input shaft of alternator until poly V-belt pulley with free‐
wheel can be removed.
Installing:
following:
– First screw poly V-belt pulley with freewheel on drive shaft of
alternator by hand as far as limit stop.
The torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- must be modified for assembly
of poly V-belt with freewheel as follows:
– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.

– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.
– Insert TORX driver bit - V.A.G 1603/1- in alternator shaft.

– Counterhold using multi-point adapter - VAS 3400- with 17 mm
ring spanner.
– Tighten poly V-belt with freewheel by turning drive shaft of al‐
ternator anti-clockwise using torque wrench - V.A.G 1332- .
– Tighten bolted connections to 80 Nm.
3.7 Removing and installing voltage regula‐

tor
⇒ “3.7.1 Removing and installing voltage regulator, manufacturer:
Bosch”, page 55
⇒ “3.7.2 Removing and installing voltage regulator, manufacturer:
Valeo”, page 55

3.7.1 Removing and installing voltage regula‐

tor, manufacturer: Bosch
♦ Torque screwdriver - V.A.G 1624-
Removing:
– Remove securing bolt and nuts -arrows- and remove protec‐
tive cap from alternator.
– Unscrew securing bolts of voltage regulator -arrows-.

– Carefully remove voltage regulator from alternator.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.
– Tighten bolted connections of voltage controller at alternator
to 2 Nm.
– Tighten bolted connections of protective cap at alternator to
4.5 Nm.
3.7.2 Removing and installing voltage regula‐

tor, manufacturer: Valeo
3. Alternator 55
♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1783/-
Removing:
– Remove clamping rings -arrows- and remove protective cap
from alternator.
– Unscrew securing bolts of voltage regulator -arrows-.

– Carefully remove voltage regulator from alternator.
Installing:
following:
– Release locking lugs -arrows- and pull protective cap off volt‐
age regulator.
– Push carbon brushes into housing of voltage regulator and in‐
sert voltage regulator into alternator.
– Tighten bolted connections of voltage controller at alternator
to 2 Nm.

– Push protective cap into guides -arrows- until it audibly en‐

gages.
3. Alternator 57
4 Starter motor
⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview – starter”, page 58
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing starter”, page 66
⇒ “4.3 Checking starter B ”, page 88
4.1 Assembly overview – starter

⇒ “4.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, 1.4 l TSI engine, 90 KW”,
page 58
⇒ “4.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, 1.8 l TSI engine, 118 kW”,
page 60
⇒ “4.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, 1.6 l TDI engine, 77 kW,
manual gearbox MQ250-6F”, page 61
⇒ “4.1.4 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TDI engine, 103 KW,
⇒ “4.1.5 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TSI engine, 155 kW,
⇒ “4.1.6 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TSI engine, 155 kW,
dual clutch gearbox DQ250-6F”, page 64
⇒ “4.1.7 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TDI engine, 103 kW,
⇒ “4.1.8 Assembly overview - starter, 3.6 l TSI engine, 220 KW,
4.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, 1.4 l TSI engine, 90 KW

1 - Starter motor - B-
⇒ page 67
2 - Battery positive wire con‐
nection to starter
3 - Battery positive wire secur‐
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 20 Nm
4 - Starter securing bolts
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Nut of earth cable
❑ M8
❑ 20 Nm
6 - Cap
7 - Wiring retainer securing nut
❑ M8
❑ 20 Nm
8 - Wiring retainer
Not illustrated:
♦ Bolt for securing air filter housing to body: 10 Nm
4. Starter motor 59
4.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, 1.8 l TSI engine, 118 kW
⇒ page 69
nection to starter
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Protective cap
❑ M8
❑ 23 Nm
7 - Wiring retainer
Not illustrated:

4.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, 1.6 l TDI engine, 77 kW, manual gearbox
MQ250-6F
⇒ page 71
nection to starter
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Cap
❑ M8
❑ 23 Nm
7 - Wiring retainer
Not illustrated:
4. Starter motor 61
4.1.4 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TDI engine, 103 KW, manual gearbox
MQ350-6F
⇒ page 74
nection to starter
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Cap
❑ M8
❑ 23 Nm
7 - Wiring retainer
Not illustrated:

4.1.5 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TSI engine, 155 kW, manual gearbox
MQ350-6F
⇒ page 76
nection to starter
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 20 Nm
❑ M12
❑ 80 Nm
5 - Securing nut
❑ M8
❑ 20 Nm
6 - Protective cap
❑ M8
❑ 20 Nm
8 - Wiring retainer
- - Air filter housing securing
bolt to body
❑ Not illustrated
❑ 10 Nm
4. Starter motor 63
4.1.6 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TSI engine, 155 kW, dual clutch gearbox
DQ250-6F
⇒ page 79
nection to starter
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
❑ M12
❑ 80 Nm
5 - Protective cap
- - Air filter housing securing
bolt to body
❑ Not illustrated
❑ 10 Nm

4.1.7 Assembly overview - starter, 2.0 l TDI engine, 103 kW, dual clutch gearbox
DQ250-6F
⇒ page 82
nection to starter
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Protective cap
Not illustrated:
4. Starter motor 65
4.1.8 Assembly overview - starter, 3.6 l TSI engine, 220 KW, dual clutch gearbox
DQ250-6F
⇒ page 84
nection to starter
ing nut to starter
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
❑ M12
❑ 75 Nm
5 - Protective cap
6 - Air filter housing securing
bolt to body (not illustrated)
❑ M6
❑ 10 Nm
7 - Earth wire to gearbox hous‐
ing (not illustrated)
❑ M8
❑ 15 Nm
4.2 Removing and installing starter

⇒ “4.2.1 Removing and installing starter B , 1.4 l TSI engine, 90
kW, manual gearbox MQ200-6F”, page 67
KW, manual gearbox MQ250-6F”, page 69
⇒ “4.2.3 Removing and installing starter B , 1.6 l TDI engine,
77KW, manual gearbox MQ250-6F”, page 71
⇒ “4.2.4 Removing and installing starter B , 2.0 l TDI engine, 103
KW, manual gearbox MQ350-6F”, page 74
⇒ “4.2.5 Removing and installing starter B , 2.0 l TSI engine,
155 KW, manual gearbox MQ350-6F”, page 76
kW, dual clutch gearbox DQ250-6F”, page 79
⇒ “4.2.7 Removing and installing starter B , 2.0 l TDI engine, 103
kW, dual clutch gearbox DQ250-6F”, page 82

⇒ “4.2.8 Removing and installing starter B , 3.6 l TSI engine,

220 KW, dual clutch gearbox DQ250-6F”, page 84
4.2.1 Removing and installing starter - B- ,

1.4 l TSI engine, 90 kW, manual gearbox
MQ200-6F
Removing:
4. Starter motor 67
– Push protective cap -1- off solenoid switch downwards in di‐

rection of -arrow-.
– Undo nut -1- and take positive wire -2- off thread of solenoid
switch.
– Undo nut -1- from upper securing bolt of starter and remove
earth cable -2-.
– Remove upper securing bolt of starter, lies behind.
insulation .
– Unscrew nuts -1-.

– Remove cable retainer -2- from lower securing bolt of starter.

– Undo alternator bolt at bottom -2-.

– Remove starter -1- by taking it downwards out of the vehicle.
Installing:
following:
4.2.2 Removing and installing starter - B- , 1.8 l TSI engine, 118 KW, manual
gearbox MQ250-6F

equipment required

♦ Pliers for spring-type clips - VAS 5024-
4. Starter motor 69
Removing:
– Pull protective cap off solenoid switch downwards in direction
of -arrow-.
– Undo nut -1- and detach positive wire from connection thread
of solenoid switch.
– Release connector of terminal 50 -2- and separate.
– Unscrew earth cable from upper bolt of starter -arrow-.
– Remove upper securing bolt of starter -arrow-.

insulation .

– Undo nut -1- and remove it from lower securing bolt of starter.
– Remove cable retainer -2-.
– Remove lower securing bolt of starter -arrow-.

– Remove starter by taking it downwards out of the vehicle.
Installing:
following:
4.2.3 Removing and installing starter - B- , 1.6 l TDI engine, 77KW, manual gear‐
box MQ250-6F
4. Starter motor 71

equipment required

Removing:
– Push protective cap off solenoid switch downwards in direction
of -arrow-.

– Undo nut -1- and detach positive wire from connection thread
of solenoid switch.
– Release connector of terminal 50 -2- and separate.
– Unscrew securing nut -arrow- and take earth wire off upper
securing bolt of starter.

insulation .
– Undo nut -1- from lower securing bolt of starter.

– Remove wire retainer -2-.
4. Starter motor 73
– Undo lower starter bolt -arrow-.

Installing:
following:
4.2.4 Removing and installing starter - B- , 2.0 l TDI engine, 103 KW, manual
gearbox MQ350-6F

equipment required


Removing:
of -arrow-.
– Unscrew positive cable -1- and release and detach connector

of terminal 50 -2-.
– Unscrew earth cable from upper bolt of starter -arrow-.

insulation .
4. Starter motor 75
– Remove wire retainer -2-.

Installing:
following:
4.2.5 Removing and installing starter - B- , 2.0 l TSI engine, 155 KW, manual
gearbox MQ350-6F


equipment required

Removing:
– Loosen spring-type clip -2- using spring-type clip pliers - VAS
5024- .
4. Starter motor 77
– Release locking lug -arrow- and remove cover.
– Pull hose -arrow- off air filter housing and remove from vehicle.
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- of air filter housing.

– Pull air filter housing upwards out of rubber mountings and
remove it from vehicle.
– Push protective cap -1- downwards off solenoid switch in

-direction of arrow-.

– Unlock connector -1- of terminal 50 and disconnect.

– Unscrew nut -2- and remove positive cable -3- from solenoid
switch.

insulation .
– Remove cable retainer -2-.
– Unscrew starter securing bolt -arrow-.

– Remove starter downwards from vehicle.
Installing:
following:
4.2.6 Removing and installing starter - B- , 2.0 l TSI engine, 155 kW, dual clutch
gearbox DQ250-6F
4. Starter motor 79

equipment required

Removing:
5024- .

– Release locking lug -arrow- and remove cover.
– Pull hose -arrow- off air filter housing and remove from vehicle.

– Pull air filter housing upwards out of rubber mountings and
remove it from vehicle.

of -arrow-.
4. Starter motor 81
– Unbolt positive wire -1- and detach connector of terminal 50

-2-.

– Remove starter upwards from vehicle.
Installing:
following:
4.2.7 Removing and installing starter - B- , 2.0 l TDI engine, 103 kW, dual clutch
gearbox DQ250-6F


equipment required

Removing:
of -arrow-.
4. Starter motor 83
– Unscrew positive cable -1- and release and detach connector

of terminal 50 -2-.

– Remove starter by taking it upwards out of the vehicle.
Installing:
following:
4.2.8 Removing and installing starter - B- , 3.6 l TSI engine, 220 KW, dual clutch
gearbox DQ250-6F


equipment required

Removing:
5024 A- .
4. Starter motor 85
– Release locking lug -arrow- and remove cover in

– Release locking lugs -arrows- and pull air duct forwards in

-direction of arrow- out of retainer.

– Pull air filter housing upwards out of rubber mountings
– and remove it from vehicle.
– Unbolt earth cable -arrow- from gearbox and lay to side.
Note
To avoid corrosion damage, do not loosen earth cable from earth

point on body.

– Unscrew securing bolts for air filter housing bracket -arrows-

– and remove air filter housing bracket from vehicle.
insulation .
– Unscrew lower securing bolt -arrow- for starter.

– Push protective cap -2- downwards off solenoid switch in
– Unscrew securing nut -arrow- and lay positive cable to side.
4. Starter motor 87

– Remove starter upwards from vehicle.
Installing:
following:
4.3 Checking starter - B-

– ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Finding .

5 Cruise control system (CCS)

⇒ Electrical System, General Information; Rep. gr. 27 ; Cruise
control system .
5. Cruise control system (CCS) 89

6 Start/stop system
⇒ “6.1 Components of start/stop system”, page 90
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing voltage stabiliser J532 ”,
page 91
6.1 Components of start/stop system
Note
♦ Additional information:
♦ ⇒ Operating manual of vehicle
♦ ⇒ Self-study programme No. 426 ; The start/stop system
2009
♦ ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting lo‐
cations
General description:
The start/stop system is used for reducing fuel consumption by
automatically switching off the engine when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and automatically starting it when the driver wants the
vehicle to move on. The start/stop mode is activated automati‐
cally. To activate the start/stop mode, the vehicle must start off
and be driven for approx. 4 seconds with a minimum speed of 3
km/h.
Fault detection and fault display:
The start/stop system as a function is integrated in the engine
control unit - J623- software.
The engine control unit - J623- features self-diagnosis to facilitate
fault finding.
For fault finding, use the systems described in chapter “Vehicle
diagnosis, testing and information system” in “Guided Fault Find‐
ing” mode ⇒ page 357 .
Battery recharging or jump start on vehicles with start/stop sys‐
tem:
When recharging or jump starting vehicles with start/stop system,
note the following: first connect charging cable to battery positive
terminal, then body earth. This ensures that the battery sensor is
not bridged. The direct charging of the battery on the negative
terminal clamp shunts current around the battery sensor. The
battery data are not registered by the sensor while charging.
Then, the values concerning the battery state and saved in the
data bus diagnostic interface would not correspond to the values
of the charged battery.
Because of its higher deep-cycle resistance, only an absorbent
glass mat battery is used as a starter battery instead of the normal
lead battery in vehicles with start/stop system.
In case of repair, note correct part number designations in ETKA.
Components adapted to start/stop system are not identified sep‐
arately and are not or barely different from normal components in
their appearance.

Note

Following components are involved in the start/stop system:

♦ Battery - A- ⇒ page 2
♦ Alternator - C- ⇒ page 22
♦ Voltage regulator - C1-
♦ Starter - B- ⇒ page 58
♦ Brake light switch - F-
♦ Clutch pedal switch - F36-
♦ Start/stop operation switch - E693-
⇒ “2.29 Removing and installing Start/Stop operation button
E693 ”, page 302
♦ Coolant temperature sender - G62-
♦ Accelerator pedal position sender - G79-
♦ Gearbox neutral position sender - G701-
♦ Control unit for ABS with EDL - J104-
♦ Climatronic control unit - J255-
♦ Control unit with display in dash panel insert - J285-
⇒ page 97
♦ Battery monitor control unit - J367- ⇒ page 2
♦ Convenience system central control unit - J393-
♦ Power steering control unit - J500-
♦ On-board supply control unit - J519- ⇒ page 346
♦ Voltage stabiliser - J532- ⇒ page 91
♦ Data bus diagnostic interface - J533- ⇒ page 350
♦ Engine control unit - J623-
♦ Park assist steering control unit - J791- ⇒ page 239
6.2 Removing and installing voltage stabil‐

iser - J532-
The voltage stabiliser - J532- is installed in the left wheel housing.
It has the task of stabilizing to 12 volts the high voltage fluctuations
generated in the onboard supply by the start/stop operation.
Effects in case of voltage stabiliser failure:
If the voltage stabiliser is defective, the following devices will per‐
form a reset if their own voltage supply is not sufficient when the
starter is operated:
♦ Radio,
♦ Radio navigation system or
♦ Telephone
6. Start/stop system 91
If the mentioned devices are identified as causing a reset for each

engine start when operating in start/stop mode, this indicates a
defective voltage stabiliser. Direct entries concerning malfunction
of the voltage stabiliser, e.g. in the event memory of the diagnostic
interface or the onboard supply control unit, are not done at
present. If radio, radio/navigation and telephone units have failed
together, first check fuse of voltage stabiliser.
Removing:
The voltage stabiliser - J532- is installed in the left wheel housing.
Note
Different versions (-1- or -2-) of the voltage stabiliser - J532- may

be installed.
– Remove wheel housing liner ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;

Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner; Removing and installing
wheel housing liner .
Version 1:
– Unscrew bolts, and remove control unit.
– Release and disconnect connector.
Version 2:
– Unscrew bolts -arrows- from bracket, and remove bracket.
– Unscrew bolts, and remove control unit.
– Release and disconnect connector.
Installing:

7 Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

⇒ “7.1 Components of adaptive cruise control”, page 93
⇒ “7.2 Overview of fitting locations - adaptive cruise control”, page
93
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing adaptive cruise control button
E357 ”, page 94
⇒ “7.4 Removing and installing adaptive cruise control unit J428
”, page 94
⇒ “7.5 Calibrating adaptive cruise control”, page 95
7.1 Components of adaptive cruise control
Note
Additional information:
⇒ Operating manual
⇒ Self-study programme No. 488 ; The Passat 2011
⇒ Self-study programme No. 276 ; The Phaeton - Adaptive cruise
control (ACC)
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an assistance system for the
driver which expands the functions of the cruise control system
(CCS). An ACC vehicle is kept at a convenient adjustable dis‐
tance from a slower vehicle in front by reducing the engine torque
and operating the brakes if necessary. The status of the adaptive
cruise control is influenced by the following components:
♦ the adaptive cruise control button - E357- on steering column,
♦ the accelerator,
♦ the brake pedal,
♦ the selector lever and
♦ intervention by other driver assist systems.
The adaptive cruise control unit - J428- is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis, which is designed to simplify fault finding.
Whenever the adaptive cruise control unit - J428- has been re‐
moved, installed or replaced, the ACC must be calibrated by
means of the function “Adaption and adjustment” on a wheel bal‐
ancing stand ⇒ page 95 .
7.2 Overview of fitting locations - adaptive cruise control
7. Adaptive cruise control (ACC) 93

1 - Adaptive cruise control but‐

ton - E357-
The adaptive cruise control
button - E357- is a component
of the CCS positive switch on
the steering column.
Removing and installing CCS

positive switch on steering col‐
umn ⇒ page 94
2 - Adaptive cruise control unit

- J428-
The adaptive cruise control
unit - J428- cannot be disman‐
tled and comprises the follow‐
ing components:
♦ Adaptive cruise control unit
- J428-
♦ Adaptive cruise control
sensor - G550-
♦ Adaptive cruise control
sensor heater - Z47-
Removing and installing adap‐
tive cruise control unit - J428-
⇒ page 94 .
7.3 Removing and installing adaptive cruise

control button - E357-
The adaptive cruise control button - E357- is a component of the
CCS positive switch on the steering column.
Removing and installing CCS positive switch on steering column
⇒ page 219
7.4 Removing and installing adaptive cruise

control unit - J428-
The adaptive cruise control unit - J428- is installed behind the VW
badge in the radiator grille at the front of the vehicle.
The adaptive cruise control unit - J428- cannot be dismantled and
comprises the following components:
♦ Adaptive cruise control sensor - G550-
♦ Adaptive cruise control sensor heater - Z47-
Removing:

– Remove radiator grille ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.

gr. 66 ; Radiator grille/front trim; Removing and installing ra‐
diator grille .
– Unclip adaptive cruise control unit - J428- -1- from the three
fasteners -2-.
– Swing adaptive cruise control unit - J428- -1- forwards, taking
connected wiring length into consideration.
– Release and detach connector -2- and remove adaptive cruise

control unit - J428- .
Installing:
following:
The adaptive cruise control sensor - G550- in the adaptive cruise
control unit - J428- must be calibrated after:
♦ Each removal and installation or renewal of the adaptive cruise
control sensor - G550-
♦ Each removal and installation or replacement of the subframe
♦ When excessive force has been exerted on these compo‐
nents, after a collision or similar
– Whenever the adaptive cruise control unit - J428- has been
removed, installed or replaced, the ACC must be calibrated by
means of the function “Adaption and adjustment” on a wheel
balancing stand ⇒ page 95 .
7.5 Calibrating adaptive cruise control

The following functions for adaptive cruise control unit - J428- can
be adapted:
♦ Coding
♦ Incorrect software version in control unit
♦ Data sets of control unit changed
♦ Adaption and adjustment
♦ Adaptation work before radar
♦ Adaption of front scan system (Front Assist)
♦ Adaptation, special measures T1
♦ Adaptation, special measures T2
♦ Adaptation, Follow to Stop
♦ Reading measured values ACC
♦ Adapting control unit for ACC software
Calibrating sensor for adaptive cruise control - G550- : ⇒ Running
gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 44 ; Adaptive cruise control (ACC);
Calibrating ACC
7. Adaptive cruise control (ACC) 95

♦ Vehicle diagnostic tester
♦ Diagnostic cable - VAS 5051/6A-

90 – Gauges, instruments
1 Dash panel insert
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing dash panel insert K ”, page 97
⇒ “1.2 Multi-pin connector pin assignment on dash panel insert K
”, page 99
1.1 Removing and installing dash panel in‐

sert - K-
Fault detection and fault display ⇒ page 97
Removing dash panel insert ⇒ page 98
Installing dash panel insert ⇒ page 98
Resetting service interval display ⇒ page 98
Code dash panel insert ⇒ page 98
Note
♦ Dash panel insert functions and components can be checked

by way of dash panel insert final control diagnosis.

⇒ Operating instructions
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work
The following components are integrated in the dash panel insert:
♦ Control unit with display in dash panel insert - J285-
♦ Fuel gauge sender - G-
♦ Fuel gauge - G1-
♦ Ambient temperature sensor - G17-
♦ Speedometer - G21-
♦ Oil level and oil temperature sender - G266-
♦ Coolant temperature gauge - G3-
♦ Rev. counter - G5-
♦ Warning lamps
All warning lamps are fitted with light-emitting diodes (LEDs). No
provision is made for dash panel insert repair. If necessary, the
dash panel insert is renewed as a unit ⇒ page 98 .
Note
The immobiliser control unit - J362- is integrated in the conven‐

ience system central control unit - J393- .

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
1. Dash panel insert 97

Note
Before removing the dash panel insert, the work procedure

“Adapting/replacing dash panel insert” should always be carried
out in order that the data stored in the control unit can be interro‐
gated ⇒ page 98 .
Removing dash panel insert

– Remove dash panel trim on driver side ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing
and installing dash panel trim on driver side .
– Remove dash panel insert trim ⇒ General body repairs, inte‐
rior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing and in‐
stalling dash panel insert gap cover .
Note
It is not necessary to remove the steering wheel.
– Remove securing screws -arrows- of dash panel.

– Pull dash panel insert backwards straight out of dash panel,
taking connected wiring length into consideration.
– Swing locking bar -1- in -direction of arrow- and pull off con‐
nector -2-.
– Remove dash panel insert from vehicle.
Installing dash panel insert
– Following installation, check functions of dash panel insert.
Resetting service interval display:
– Resetting service interval display in “Maintenance Manual”:
⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .
Renewing dash panel insert
Coding dash panel insert
98 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments

1.2 Multi-pin connector pin assignment on

dash panel insert - K-
Note
The connector pin assignment on the dash panel insert depends

on the country, the vehicle's equipment and engine type.
Pin assignment of connectors attached to dash panel insert

tions.
Note
The dash panel insert must not be dismantled. If necessary, the

dash panel insert is renewed as a unit.
Description of back of dash panel insert ⇒ Current flow diagrams,

Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
1. Dash panel insert 99

2 Horn
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing treble horn H2 , bass horn H7 ”,
page 100
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing horn plate”, page 100
2.1 Removing and installing treble horn -

H2- , bass horn - H7-
Note
♦ The treble horn - H2- and the bass horn - H7- are actuated in
parallel by the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ The procedure for removal and installation of both horns is the
same and is therefore described for just one horn.
♦ The signal horns can be tested by means of the final control
diagnostic function of the onboard power supply control unit -
J519- .
Removing:
insulation .
– Unscrew securing bolt -1- and remove signal horn -3- together
with bracket.
Installing:
– Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note
the following:
2.2 Removing and installing horn plate

The horn is operated via the spring mounted cover in the centre
of the steering wheel. Depending on equipment, the horn plate is
either a component part of the steering wheel or integrated into
the airbag unit on the driver side and cannot be replaced as an
individual item. If horn plate is defective, replace driver side airbag
unit or steering wheel.
Remove driver side airbag unit ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 69 ; Driver side airbag; Removing and installing airbag
unit with igniter .
Remove steering wheel ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep.
gr. 48 ; Steering wheel; Removing and installing steering wheel .
Checking horn plate
100 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments

92 – Windscreen wash/wipe system

1 Windscreen wiper system
⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - windscreen wiper system”,
page 101
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing wiper blade”, page 102
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing wiper arms”, page 102
⇒ “1.4 Adjusting wiper arms”, page 104
⇒ “1.5 Renewing windscreen wiper rubber”, page 105
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing wiper motor V ”, page 106
⇒ “1.7 Deactivating APP function of wiper motor”, page 110
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing rain and light sensor G397 ”, page
111
1.1 Assembly overview - windscreen wiper system
1 - Joint-free wiper blades

⇒ page 102
❑ Adjusting park position
⇒ page 104
wiper rubber blade
⇒ page 105
2 - Wiper motor - V- with con‐
trol unit for wiper motor - J400-
⇒ page 106
❑ Coding wiper motor
control unit / deactivat‐
ing APP function
⇒ page 110
3 - Wiper arms
⇒ page 102
4 - Wiper frame securing bolts
with linkage to body
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Wiper arm securing nut to
linkage
❑ 20 Nm
6 - Caps
7 - Wiper frame with linkage
⇒ page 106
8 - Securing nut of wiper frame
to body
❑ 5 Nm
9 - Wiper motor securing bolts to wiper frame with linkage
❑ 12 Nm
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info 1. Windscreen wiper system 101

10 - Securing nut of motor crank of wiper motor shaft

❑ 17 Nm
1.2 Removing and installing wiper blade

To remove the wiper blades, the wiper arms must be placed in
the “service/winter position”. Activating the “service/winter posi‐
tion”:
– Press wiper lever into “flick wipe” position within 10 seconds
after ignition is switched off.
For additional information refer to the ⇒ Owner's Manual for the
vehicle.
Removing:
Note
♦ Driver and front passenger wiper blades must not be inter‐

changed during installation.
♦ Joint-free wiper blades are very flexible. Only grip wiper blades
in area of wiper blade attachment to lift off windscreen.
– Operate wiper arms until they are in “service/winter position”.

– Lift up wiper arm.
– Press catch -1- and pull wiper blade mounting -3- out of wiper
arm -2- as far as the stop.
– Swivel wiper blade as shown in illustration.
– Pull wiper blade mounting -3- in direction of arrow off wiper
arm -2-.
Installing:
– Push wiper blade mounting -3- onto wiper arm -2- to stop.
– Ensure catch -1- is engaged securely in wiper arm -2-.
– Carefully fold wiper arm back onto windscreen.
1.3 Removing and installing wiper arms

102 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system

♦ Puller - T10369-
Removing:
– Lever off caps -arrows- using a suitable screwdriver.
– Remove securing nuts -arrows-.
1. Windscreen wiper system 103

– Slide legs of puller - T10369/1- -2- under wiper arm -4- as

shown in the illustration.
Caution
The wiper shaft may be damaged.

Always use thrust piece -3- to loosen wiper arm.
– Turn thrust bolt -1- of puller clockwise until thrust piece -3-
comes into contact with wiper shaft. Turn thrust bolt -1- of
puller clockwise using a 6 mm Allen key until wiper arm -4- is
released from shaft.
– Remove puller and wiper arm.
– Repeat this procedure on front passenger side if necessary.
Installing:
following:
Note
Securing nuts of wiper arms -arrows- are not tightened to speci‐

fied torque until after wiper blade park position has been adjusted.
– Operate wiper motor briefly until park position is reached.

– To do this, switch on ignition and briefly press the steering
column switch downwards once (flick wipe).
– When the wiper motor stops, switch ignition off again.
– Fit wiper arms in approximate park position on wiper arm
shafts.
– Tighten securing nuts -arrows- by hand.
– Adjust wiper blade park position ⇒ page 104 .
1.4 Adjusting wiper arms

Note
The wiper blades are installed as a mirror image on right-hand

drive vehicles.

– Deactivate APP function ⇒ page 110 .

– Operate wiper motor until it reaches park position and then
switch ignition off.
– Adjust windscreen wiper park position.
Driver side:
Distance -A- between middle of wiper blade and lower edge of
windscreen should be 39 mm.
– Adjust wiper blade park position by moving wiper arm if nec‐
essary ⇒ page 102 .
– Tighten securing nut to torque specified in assembly overview
⇒ page 101 .
Front passenger side:

Distance -B- between wiper blade and upper edge of plenum
chamber cover should be 14 mm.
– Adjust wiper blade park position by moving wiper arm if nec‐
essary ⇒ page 102 .
– Tighten securing nut to torque specified in assembly overview
⇒ page 101 .
1.5 Renewing windscreen wiper rubber
Note
Refer to chapter »Distinguishing features of joint-free wiper

blades« in Workshop manual “Electrical system, General infor‐
mation”. A link to this workshop manual is not possible at present
for technical reasons. Select the workshop manual “Electrical
System, General Information” manually in ELSA.
– Remove joint-free wiper blade ⇒ page 102 .

– Check to see on which side the wiper rubber blade cannot be
pushed into the guide.

– On the side that cannot be pushed into the guide, carefully

lever off cap -1- in -direction of arrow-.
– Using a suitable screwdriver, open the wiper rubber stop -A-

by bending up in -direction of arrow-.
– Renew wiper rubber blade.
Note
Ensure that wiper rubber blade is seating correctly in wiper rubber

blade guides.
– Push wiper blade stop -A- back down in -direction of arrow-

using a suitable screwdriver until wiper rubber blade can no
longer be moved in the guide.
– Fit new cap -1- in -direction of arrow- and check it is seated

securely.
– Refit joint-free wiper blade ⇒ page 102 .
– Check wiper blade is working correctly.
1.6 Removing and installing wiper motor - V-

Removing windscreen wiper system: ⇒ page 108 .
Installing windscreen wiper system: ⇒ page 108 .
Removing windscreen wiper motor: ⇒ page 109 .
Installing windscreen wiper motor: ⇒ page 109 .
Deactivating APP function of wiper motor: ⇒ page 110 .

Caution
When disconnecting or reconnecting the battery, adhere strict‐

ly to the procedure described in the workshop manual
⇒ page 4 .
Note
♦ The function of the windscreen wiper motor can be checked

using the final control diagnosis feature of the onboard supply
Self-study Programme ⇒ Self-study programme No. 488 ; The
Passat 2011
The wiper motor control unit - J400- and the wiper motor - - are
combined to form one unit.
The wiper motor control unit - J400- is equipped with self-diag‐
nosis, which makes fault finding easier.
The windscreen wiper system can be tested by means of the final
control diagnosis function of the onboard supply control unit -
J519- .

♦ Release lever - 80-200-
Removing windscreen wiper system
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
– Deactivate APP function ⇒ page 110 .

– Move wipers to park position and then switch off ignition.
– Remove wiper arms ⇒ page 102 .
– Remove plenum chamber cover ⇒ General body repairs, ex‐
terior; Rep. gr. 50 ; Plenum chamber cover; Removing and
installing plenum chamber cover .
– Unclip wiring retainer -3- from retaining plate of wiper frame.
– Remove nut together with washer -4-.
– Remove securing bolts -1-.
– Remove wiper frame together with linkage and wiper motor
from vehicle.
Installing windscreen wiper system
following:

– Insert wiper motor together with frame and linkage into vehicle.
– Screw in securing bolts -1-.
– Screw on nut together with washer -4-.
– Attach connector -2- to wiper motor connection until it engag‐
es.
– Clip wiring retainer -3- into hole of retaining plate.
– Install plenum chamber cover and plenum chamber seal in
reverse order of removal.
– Installing wiper arms ⇒ page 102 .
Removing windscreen wiper motor:
– Removing windscreen wiper system ⇒ page 108
– Lever ball head -arrow- of linkage -1- off motor crank using
release lever - 80-200- or a suitable screwdriver.
– Unscrew hexagon nut -1-.

– Pull motor crank -2- off wiper motor shaft.
– Remove securing bolts -arrows- and retaining plate -3-.
– Remove wiper motor with control unit from wiper frame down‐
wards.
Installing windscreen wiper motor:
following:
– Install wiper motor with control unit to wiper frame, ensuring it

seats correctly in cut-outs -arrows- in linkage.

– Place retaining plate -1- in position and screw in securing bolts

-arrows-.
– Tighten securing bolts -arrows- to torque specified in assem‐
bly overview ⇒ page 101 .
– Fit motor crank -4- onto shaft of wiper motor -2- so that the
three illustrated points -1-, -2- and -3- are on the same line.
– Firmly bolt motor crank -2- onto shaft of wiper motor with nut
-1-.
– Tighten nut -1- to torque specified in assembly overview
⇒ page 101 .
– Press ball head -arrow- of linkage -1- onto motor crank.

– Install windscreen wiper system ⇒ page 108 .
1.7 Deactivating APP function of wiper mo‐

tor
The windscreen wiper system is equipped with an APP function
(alternating park position).
With the APP function, the wiper is moved up slightly once it has
reached the lowest position. This occurs every second time the
wiper system is switched off.

To fit the motor crank on the wiper motor, it is necessary for the
motor to be in the lowest park position. To ensure this position is
reached, the APP function must be deactivated.
Note
♦ The APP function cannot be activated.

♦ After 100 cycles of wiper movement, the APP function is acti‐
vated automatically. This applies to wiper motors on which the
APP function has been deactivated and also to new wiper mo‐
tors.
Note
Following successful completion of APP function coding / deac‐

tivation, the wiper motor is located in the lower park position after
the next wipe cycle.
1.8 Removing and installing rain and light

sensor - G397-
Note
The rain and light sensor - G397- can be checked by means of

the final control diagnostic function of the onboard supply control
unit - J519- .
If an intact rain and light sensor - G397- is removed from its re‐
taining plate on the windscreen (e.g. renewing a windscreen) it
can be subsequently reinstalled. Store the removed rain and light
sensor - G397- in a dust-free location until reinstallation and en‐
sure the silicone contact pad is not soiled.
Removing:
Note
Depending on the level of equipment, the installation situation of

the rain and light sensor - G397- can differ from what is shown in
the illustrations. Removal and installation are carried out in the
same way in all vehicles irrespectively of what equipment is fitted.

– Remove interior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Interior mirror; Removing and installing interior mirror .

– Remove wire cover -2-.

– Pull off connector -1- of rain and light sensor - G397- -3-.
– Use, for example, a suitable blade-type screwdriver to prise

the rain and light detector sensor - G397- -1- out of the retain‐
ing plate -2- on the windscreen.
Note
On removal, take care to prise out the entire rain and light sensor
- G397- and not just the upper shell of the rain and light sensor -
G397- .
Installing:
– Thoroughly clean the windscreen inside the retaining plate
with isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol).
– If necessary, remove protective cap from new rain and light
detector sensor - G397- .
Note
♦ The surface (contact pad) of the rain and light sensor - G397-
must not be soiled on installation.
♦ If the surface (coupling pad) of the rain and light sensor - G397-
is soiled, it may be possible to clean it by “bonding on” and
then “pulling off” one or more adhesive strips.
– Insert rain and light sensor - G397- -1- into the retaining plate
on front windscreen -2- by pressing it in firmly.
Note
There must not be any air bubbles between the windscreen and
the contact pad of the rain and light sensor - G397- following in‐
stallation.

– Connect electrical connector -1-.

– Secure rain sensor -2- by installing wire cover and interior mir‐
ror.
Coding rain and light sensor
This test program allows you to code the light/rain sensor.

2 Windscreen washer system

⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview - windscreen washer system”,
page 114
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir”,
page 116
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing washer pump V5 / windscreen and
rear window washer pump V59 ”, page 120
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing windscreen washer fluid level
sender G33 ”, page 121
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing washer jets”, page 122
⇒ “2.6 Adjusting spray jets”, page 122
2.1 Assembly overview - windscreen wash‐

er system
Note
The window washer fluid reservoir may be of a single chamber or

double chamber design depending on equipment installed. The
following illustrations show the double chamber saloon version of
the windscreen and headlight washer system.

1 - Windscreen washer system

spray jets
⇒ page 122
❑ Adjusting ⇒ page 122
2 - Angled connection piece
❑ Connection to spray jet
for windscreen washer
system
❑ Overview of hose cou‐
plings for washer fluid
lines ⇒ page 134
3 - Y-piece
❑ Distribution of wash wa‐
ter line to windscreen
washer system spray
jets
4 - Upper part of window wash‐
er system and headlight wash‐
er system reservoir.
⇒ page 117
single chamber wind‐
screen washer reservoir
⇒ page 116
5 - Lower part of window wash‐
⇒ page 117
6 - Washer pump - V5-
❑ Windscreen and rear
window washer pump -
V59- for Variant
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 120
❑ Checking windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- ⇒ page 346
❑ Connection to washer pump - V5-
❑ Overview of hose couplings for washer fluid lines ⇒ page 134
8 - Windscreen washer fluid level sender - G33-
9 - Hose
❑ Hose repair ⇒ page 134
2. Windscreen washer system 115

2.2 Removing and installing washer fluid

reservoir
Note
♦ The window washer fluid reservoir may be of a single chamber

or double chamber design depending on equipment installed.
♦ Windscreen washer reservoir is of single chamber design on
vehicles with no headlight washer system.
♦ Washer fluid reservoir is of double chamber design on vehicles
with windscreen and headlight washer systems.
⇒ “2.2.1 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir, one-

piece version”, page 116 .
⇒ “2.2.2 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir, two-piece
version”, page 117
2.2.1 Removing and installing washer fluid

reservoir, one-piece version
Note
♦ The following illustration shows the Variant version of the win‐

dow washer system reservoir with installed windscreen and
rear window washer pump - V59- . In the Saloon version, the
windscreen and rear window washer pump - V5- is fitted with
a hose union.
♦ The connections at the pump and the retaining clips on the
hose connectors are colour-coded. This prevents incorrect
connection of the washer fluid lines to the windscreen and rear
window washer pump - V59- . The hose unions must be con‐
nected to the correct colour-coded pump connections during
installation.

Removing:
– Remove front bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Front bumper; Removing and installing front
bumper .
– Remove right headlight ⇒ page 139 .

– Drain washing water from reservoir and collect in a suitable

container.
– Detach all line and hoses connected to the reservoir for the
windscreen and rear window -5-.
– Release hose unions -3- and -4- and pull them off windscreen
and rear window washer pump - V59- . Collect any escaping
washing fluid in a suitable container.
Note
Depending on equipment fitted, there may be a requirement to

release retainers for pipework blocking access to securing bolt
-2-.
– Remove securing bolts -1-, -2- and -3-.

– Take window washer system reservoir -4- out of vehicle to‐
wards the front.
Installing:
following:
Note
Ensure that no surrounding lines are trapped when installing the

reservoir. The lines must be clipped onto the reservoir in their
original positions.

2.2.2 Removing and installing washer fluid

reservoir, two-piece version
Removing upper part of washer fluid reservoir:

bumper .

– Remove right headlight ⇒ page 139 .

– Drain washing water from reservoir and collect in a suitable
container.
– Detach all line and hoses connected to the upper part of the
reservoir for the windscreen/ rear window and headlight wash‐
er system -3-.
Note
Depending on equipment fitted, there may be a requirement to

release retainers for pipework blocking access to securing bolt
-2-.
– Remove securing bolts -1-, -2- and -5-.

– Loosen and pull out the spreader rivet -4-.
– Pull upper part -3- of reservoir vertically upwards out of rubber
grommet -7- of lower part -6- of reservoir.
– Remove upper part of reservoir -3- by taking it out of the ve‐
hicle towards the front.
Installing upper part of washer fluid reservoir:
following:
Note
♦ Before assembling the two reservoir halves moisten rubber

grommet -7- with for example a rubber and plastic compatible
lubricant (e.g. polyethylene glycol).
♦ Ensure that no surrounding lines are trapped when installing
the upper part of the washer fluid reservoir. The lines must be
clipped onto the reservoir in their original positions.

– Working from above, insert upper part -3- of reservoir vertically

into rubber grommet -7- of lower part -6- of reservoir.
– On completion of installation work, bleed headlight washer
system ⇒ page 132 .
Removing lower part of washer fluid reservoir:
Note
♦ The following illustrations show the Variant version of the win‐

dow washer system reservoir with installed windscreen and
rear window washer pump - V59- . In the Saloon version, the
windscreen and rear window washer pump - V5- is fitted with
a hose union.
♦ The connections at the pump and the retaining clips on the
hose connectors are colour-coded. This prevents incorrect
connection of the washer fluid lines to the windscreen and rear
window washer pump - V59- . The hose unions must be con‐
nected to the correct colour-coded pump connections during
installation.

– Upper part of window washer system and headlight washer
system reservoir ⇒ page 117 .
– Detach all line and hoses connected to the lower part of the
reservoir for the windscreen/ rear window and headlight wash‐
er system -3-.
– Release and detach connector -1- of headlight washer system
pump - V11- -9-.
– Release and detach connector -2- of windscreen and rear
window washer pump - V59- -6-.
– Release and disconnect connector -4- of windscreen washer
fluid level sender - G33- -3-.
– Release the hose unions -5- and -7- and pull them off the
windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- -6-.
– If necessary, collect any escaping washer fluid in a suitable
container.
– Remove securing bolt -1-.

– Pull lower part of reservoir -2- forwards out of grooves of re‐
taining plate -3-.
Installing lower part of washer fluid reservoir:
following:

The guides on the inner side of the lower part of the reservoir
-2- must be inserted into the grooves of the retainer -3- on the
vehicle when installing.
– Install upper part of window washer system and headlight
washer system reservoir ⇒ page 117 .
2.3 Removing and installing washer pump -

V5- / windscreen and rear window wash‐
er pump - V59-
Note
♦ The function of the windscreen and rear window washer sys‐

tem can be checked using the final control diagnosis of the
onboard supply control unit - J519- ⇒ page 346 .
♦ Additional information: ⇒ Self-study programme No. 488 ; The
Passat 2011

⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Note
The following illustration shows the Variant version of the window

washer system reservoir with installed windscreen and rear win‐
dow washer pump - V59- . In the Saloon version, the windscreen
and rear window washer pump - V5- is fitted with one hose union.
Removal and installation of the windscreen and rear window
washer system pump - V5- are carried out in the same way.
Removing:
bumper .

– Release the hose unions -5- and -7- and pull them off the
windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- -6-.
– Collect any escaping washer fluid in a suitable container.
– Pull windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- -6- up‐
wards out of reservoir -8-.
Installing:
Note
The connections at the pump and the retaining clips on the hose
connectors are colour-coded. This prevents incorrect connection
of the washer fluid lines to the windscreen and rear window wash‐
er pump - V59- . The hose unions must be connected to the
correct colour-coded pump connections during installation.
following:
2.4 Removing and installing windscreen

washer fluid level sender - G33-
The windscreen washer fluid level sender - G33- is mounted on
the washer fluid reservoir before the front right wheel housing.
Removing:
bumper .
– Pull windscreen washer fluid level sender - G33- -3- out of its
rubber seal.
Installing:
following:

2.5 Removing and installing washer jets

Removing:
– Push spray jet upwards -arrow A- and pull out of flap at the
rear -arrow B-.
– Release hose clip -1- in -direction of arrow- and pull hose con‐
nection -2- off spray jet.
– Release and detach connector -3- and remove spray jet -4-.
Installing:
– Attach connector -3- and hose union -2- to spray jet.
– Starting at the top, push spray jet into mounting hole until it
locks in place audibly.
– Adjusting spray jets ⇒ page 122 .
2.6 Adjusting spray jets
Caution
♦ Risk of damage.
♦ The spray jet may be damaged.
♦ Never use items to clean the washer jets!
Note
In case of uneven spray field due to impurities in the spray jet:

remove spray jet and rinse it through with water, opposite to di‐
rection of spray. Subsequent blowing through with compressed
air against the spraying direction is permitted. Never use items to
clean the washer jets!
Adjust windscreen washer system spray jets ⇒ Maintenance ;

Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

3 Rear window wiper system

⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview - rear window wiper system”,
page 123
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing wiper blade”, page 123
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing wiper arm”, page 124
⇒ “3.4 Adjusting wiper arm”, page 125
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing rear window wiper motor V12 ”,
page 126
3.1 Assembly overview - rear window wiper system
1 - Cover
2 - Hexagon flange nut (13 mm
spanner)
❑ 12 Nm
3 - Wiper arm
⇒ page 124
❑ Adjusting rear window
wiper park position
⇒ page 125 .
4 - Sealing
5 - Spray nozzle
❑ Renewing ⇒ page 129
❑ Adjusting ⇒ page 129
6 - Rear window wiper motor -
V12-
⇒ page 126
7 - M6 hexagon nut with wash‐
er
❑ 8 Nm
8 - Rubber ring
9 - Distance piece
10 - Wiper blade
aerodynamic wipers
⇒ page 123 .
3.2 Removing and installing wiper blade
Note
Joint-free wiper blades are very flexible. To lift the joint-free wiper
blade off the rear window, grasp it only in the area in which the
wiper blade is attached to the wiper.
3. Rear window wiper system 123

Removing:
– Fold wiper arm -2- away from window.
– Pull wiper blade fitting -1-out of wiper arm -2- -arrow-.
– Remove wiper blade fitting -1- from wiper arm shaft -2-.
Installing:
– Push wiper blade fitting -1- onto shaft -2- of wiper arm -3-.
– Push wiper blade fitting into wiper arm until it engages.
– Carefully fold wiper arm back onto rear window.
3.3 Removing and installing wiper arm

Removing:
– To move wiper arm to park position, switch ignition on and then
switch rear window wiper on and off.

– Fold cover cap -1- of rear window wiper up and unclip it.
– Loosen but do not completely remove hexagon nut (13 mm
spanner) -arrow-.
Note
Joint-free wiper blades are very flexible. Only grip wiper blades in
area of wiper blade attachment in order to lift wiper off rear win‐
dow.
– Fold wiper arm up and release from taper by rocking arm back
and forth sideways.
– Undo hexagon nut -arrow- and remove wiper arm
Installing:
– To move wiper motor to park position, switch ignition on and
and then switch rear window wiper on and off.
– Fit wiper arm in approximate park position on wiper arm shaft.

– Tighten securing nut -arrow- by hand.
– Adjust rear window wiper park position ⇒ page 125 .
3.4 Adjusting wiper arm

Gap -x- between end of wiper blade -1- and lower edge of window
-2- must be 25 mm.
– Adjust rear window wiper park position by moving wiper arm
if necessary ⇒ page 124 .

3.5 Removing and installing rear window

wiper motor - V12-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note
♦ The operation of the rear window wiper motor - V12- can be

checked by means of the final control diagnostic function of
the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ Additional information: ⇒ Operating instructions , ⇒ Self-study
programme No. 488 ; The Passat 2011

The onboard supply control unit features self-diagnosis to facili‐
tate fault finding.
Removing:
Remove wiper arm before removing rear window wiper motor
⇒ page 124 .
– Remove lower rear lid trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 70 ; Luggage compartment trims; Removing and in‐
stalling lower rear lid trim .
– Release hose union -2- by pulling circlip upwards and then pull
union off rear window motor connection.
– Remove hexagon nuts -arrows-.
– Carefully pull motor off the rear lid.
Installing:
following:
– Before installing rear wiper motor, moisten inner side of rubber
seal with for example a rubber and plastic compatible lubricant
(e.g. polyethylene glycol) if necessary.

– Check seal is seated correctly in opening of rear window. Mark

-1- on seal must align with mark -2- on rear window.

4 Rear window washer system

⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - rear window washer system”,
page 128
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing spray jet”, page 129
⇒ “4.3 Adjusting spray jet”, page 129
4.1 Assembly overview - rear window washer system

❑ Coupling point between
wiring harness (vehicle
interior) and wiring har‐
ness (rear lid)
lines ⇒ page 134
2 - Spray jet for rear window
washer system
❑ Renewing spray jet
⇒ page 129
❑ Adjusting spray jet
⇒ page 129
❑ Connection to spray jet
for rear window washer
system
lines ⇒ page 134
4 - Upper part of window wash‐
⇒ page 117
single chamber wind‐
screen washer reservoir
⇒ page 116
5 - Lower part of window wash‐
⇒ page 117
❑ Connection to windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59- .
❑ Overview of hose couplings for washer fluid lines ⇒ page 134
7 - Windscreen and rear window washer pump - V59-
9 - Hose
❑ Hose repair ⇒ page 134

4.2 Removing and installing spray jet

Removing:
– To move wiper arm to park position, switch ignition on and then
switch rear window wiper on and off.
– Fold up cover of rear window wiper arm.
– Pull spray jet out of wiper arm shaft using suitable pliers
-arrow-.
Installing:
– Push spray jet onto stop in wiper arm shaft with spray jet
opening facing upwards.
– Adjusting spray jet ⇒ page 129 .
4.3 Adjusting spray jet
Caution
♦ Risk of damage.
4. Rear window washer system 129

5 Headlight washer system

⇒ “5.1 Assembly overview - headlight washer system”,
page 130
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing headlight washer system pump
V11 ”, page 131
⇒ “5.3 Removing and installing washer jets”, page 132
⇒ “5.4 Adjusting spray jets”, page 132
⇒ “5.5 Removing and installing pop-up cylinder”, page 132
5.1 Assembly overview - headlight washer system
1 - Pop-up cylinder with right

spray jet
spray jet assembly
⇒ page 132
❑ Adjusting spray jets
⇒ page 132
pop-up cylinder
⇒ page 132
2 - Pop-up cylinder with left
spray jet
spray jet assembly
⇒ page 132
❑ Adjusting spray jets
⇒ page 132
pop-up cylinder
⇒ page 132
3 - Angled piece
❑ Connection to left spray
jet pop-up cylinder
❑ Washer fluid line hose
couplings ⇒ page 134
4 - T-piece
❑ Distribution of washer
fluid to spray jets on
headlight washer sys‐
tem
5 - Angled piece
❑ Connection to right
spray jet pop-up cylin‐
der
❑ Washer fluid line hose couplings ⇒ page 134
6 - Upper part of window washer system and headlight washer system reservoir.
❑ Removing and installing single chamber windscreen washer reservoir ⇒ page 116
7 - Hose
8 - Angled piece
❑ Connection to headlight cleaning system pump

9 - Headlight washer system pump - V11-

11 - Lower part of window washer system and headlight washer system reservoir.
5.2 Removing and installing headlight

washer system pump - V11-
Note
♦ The operation of the headlight washer system can be checked

using the final control diagnosis of the onboard supply control
unit - J519- .
programme No. 488 ; The Passat 2011 , ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations
The headlight washer system is activated once every five times
the wiper lever is pulled. Condition is that wiper lever is pulled at
least 1.5 second towards the steering wheel and that either dip‐
ped beam or main beam is switched on.
The “active time” of the headlight washer system is variable and
can be set by means of adaptations of the onboard power supply
control unit - J519- ⇒ page 346 .
To guarantee sound functioning, the headlight washer system
must be vented following assembly work or when activated for the
first time ⇒ page 132 .
Note
The headlight washer system pump - V11- is mounted on the

washer fluid reservoir in the right-hand wheel housing.
Removing:
bumper .
5. Headlight washer system 131


– Pull headlight washer system pump - V11- -9- upwards out of
reservoir.
– If necessary, collect any escaping washer fluid in a suitable
container.
Installing:
following:
Bleeding headlight washer system
To guarantee sound functioning, the headlight washer system
must be bled following assembly work or when operated for the
first time.
– Fill washer fluid reservoir.
– Do not start the engine.
– Switch headlights “ON”.
– Operate headlight washer system several times (3-5 times, 3
seconds each time).
– Repeat this bleeding procedure until the pop-up cylinders and
spray jets are functioning soundly.
5.3 Removing and installing washer jets
Note
The pop-up cylinder with spray jet is assembled as one compo‐

nent and cannot be dismantled. If repair is required, the entire
pop-up cylinder with spray jet must be renewed.
5.4 Adjusting spray jets
Caution
♦ Risk of damage.
5.5 Removing and installing pop-up cylinder


Note
The illustrations show removal and installation of left pop-up cyl‐

inder. The removal of the right pop-up cylinder is basically a mirror
image.
Removing:
bumper .
– Pull spray jets together with cover cap -1- out of bumper cover
as far as it will go.
– Detach cover cap -1- from mounting points -arrow- on both
sides of spray jet holder.
– Release hose union -1- and pull it off pop-up cylinder -2-.
– Press catches -arrows- on both sides and pull pop-up cylinder
-2- out of mounting towards the rear.
Installing:
following:
5. Headlight washer system 133

6 Washer fluid lines

⇒ “6.1 Repairing washer fluid lines”, page 134
6.1 Repairing washer fluid lines

Repairing washer fluid lines ⇒ Electrical System, General Infor‐
mation; Rep. gr. 92 ; Washer fluid lines; Repairing washer fluid
lines .

94 – Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

1 Headlights
⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - headlight”, page 135
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlights MX1 / MX2 ”,
page 139
⇒ “1.3 Adjusting headlights MX1 / MX2 ”, page 145
⇒ “1.4 Adjusting headlight installation position”, page 145
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing front turn signal bulb M5 / M7 ”,
page 147
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing headlight dipped beam bulb M29 /
M31 ”, page 149
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing headlight main beam bulb M30 /
M32 ”, page 151
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing gas discharge bulb L13 / L14 ”,
page 153
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing bulb for daytime running light/side
light M1 / M3 ”, page 155
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing headlight range control motor
V48 / V49 ”, page 157
⇒ “1.11 Installing repair kit for headlight housing”, page 161
⇒ “1.12 Converting headlights from driving on right to driving on
left”, page 164
⇒ “1.13 Converting headlights from driving on left to driving on
right”, page 166
⇒ “1.14 Removing and installing swivel module position sensor
G474 / G475 ”, page 168
⇒ “1.15 Removing and installing dynamic cornering light control
motor V318 / V319 ”, page 169
⇒ “1.16 Removing and installing gas discharge bulb control unit
J343 / J344 ”, page 169
⇒ “1.17 Removing and installing output module for headlight
J667 / J668 ”, page 170
1.1 Assembly overview - headlight

⇒ “1.1.1 Assembly overview - headlights, with H7 bulb”,
page 135
⇒ “1.1.2 Assembly overview - headlights, with gas discharge
bulb”, page 137
⇒ “1.1.3 Assembly overview - repair kit for headlight housing”,
page 138
1.1.1 Assembly overview - headlights, with H7 bulb
1. Headlights 135
1 - Caps
2 - Front left turn signal bulb -
M5- or front right turn signal
bulb - M7-
3 - Grip with bulb holder
❑ For front turn signal bulb
4 - Left side-light bulb - M1- or
right side-light bulb - M3-
❑ Glass-base bulb
12V, W5W
5 - Left headlight main beam
bulb - M30- or right headlight
main beam bulb - M32-
❑ Bulb: H7, 12 V, 55 W
6 - Upper securing bolt
❑ 2 Nm
7 - Left headlight range control
motor - V48- or right headlight
range control motor - V49-
⇒ page 157
8 - Left headlight dipped beam
bulb - M29- or right headlight
dipped beam bulb - M31-
❑ Bulb: H7, 12 V, 55 W
9 - Securing bolts
❑ 6 Nm
10 - Adjustment bushes
❑ Correcting installation position of headlight ⇒ page 145
11 - Headlight holder
12 - Headlights
❑ Repairing headlight retaining tabs ⇒ page 161
❑ Converting headlights to drive on the left or the right
⇒ “1.12.1 Converting headlights from driving on right to driving on left, H7 headlights”, page 165 or
⇒ “1.13.1 Converting headlights from driving on left to driving on right, H7 headlights”, page 167
136 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior

1.1.2 Assembly overview - headlights, with gas discharge bulb
1 - Left gas discharge bulb -

L13- or right gas discharge
bulb - L14- (“bi-xenon”)
❑ Type D3S, 35W
2 - Front left turn signal bulb -
M5- or front right turn signal
bulb - M7-
3 - Cover
4 - Left headlight range control
motor - V48- or right headlight
range control motor - V49-
⇒ page 159
5 - Cover
6 - Control unit for cornering
light and headlight range con‐
trol - J745-
⇒ page 246
❑ Coding ⇒ page 246
Note
If the control unit for cornering light

and headlight range control - J745-
has to be coded, basic setting of the
headlights must be performed after
coding ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ;
Descriptions of work .
7 - Upper securing bolt

❑ 2 Nm
8 - Adjustment bushes
9 - Securing bolts
❑ 6 Nm
10 - Output module for left headlight - J667- or output module for right headlight - J668-
Note
After a new output module for head‐

lights has been installed, the corner‐
ing light and headlight range control
unit - J745- must be coded
⇒ page 246 . Subsequently, basic
setting of the headlights needs to be
performed ⇒ Maintenance ; Book‐
let ; Descriptions of work .
11 - Securing bolts
❑ 2 Nm
1. Headlights 137
12 - Securing bolts
❑ 2 Nm
13 - Control unit for left gas discharge bulb - J343- or control unit for right gas discharge bulb - J344-
14 - Vehicle level sender
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 43 ; Vehicle level sender; Removing
and installing front vehicle level sender .
15 - Headlight holder
16 - Headlights
❑ Converting headlights to drive on the left or the right ⇒ page 166
❑ Perform basic setting ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Work descriptions .
1.1.3 Assembly overview - repair kit for headlight housing
1 - Upper retaining tab

❑ Repairing upper retain‐
ing tab ⇒ page 161
❑ Tightening torque of se‐
curing bolts: 1 Nm
2 - Inner retaining tab
❑ Repairing inner retain‐
ing tab ⇒ page 162
curing bolts: 1 Nm
3 - Lower retaining tab
❑ Repairing rear retaining
tab ⇒ page 163
curing bolts: 1 Nm
4 - Rear retaining tab
❑ Repairing rear retaining
tab ⇒ page 163
❑ Do not forget that there
are different types of tab
or halogen headlights
and headlights with gas
discharge bulbs.
curing bolts: 1 Nm

1.2 Removing and installing headlights -

MX1- / -MX2-
⇒ “1.2.1 Removing and installing headlights MX1 / MX2 , head‐
lights with H7 bulb”, page 139
⇒ “1.2.2 Removing and installing headlights MX1 / MX2 , head‐
lights with gas discharge bulb”, page 142
1.2.1 Removing and installing headlights -

MX1- / -MX2- , headlights with H7 bulb
Note
♦ There is no need to disconnect the battery earth wire.

♦ Before working on headlights, always switch off the headlights
and move the ignition key to position 0 (locked).
♦ During removal and installation, place the radio remote control
ignition key in the vehicle's interior. This prevents the doors
from locking and possible independent activation of the “Com‐
ing Home / Leaving Home” functions.
♦ When dealing with complaints, it is absolutely essential that
the function and operation of the lighting system are first un‐
derstood.
programme No. 488 ; The Passat 2011 .

The onboard supply control unit has a self-diagnostic function,
which makes fault finding on headlights easier.
Removing headlight
Note
♦ The illustrations show removal and installation of the left head‐

light.
♦ The replacement of the left headlight and the right headlight is
analogue.
1. Headlights 139

– Release and detach connector from rear of headlight
-arrow-.
diator grille .
bumper .
– Unscrew the two securing bolts -arrows- inside and at bottom

of headlight.

– Unscrew the two securing bolts -arrows- inside and at top of

headlight.
Note
The rear securing bolt can be reached with a Torx T30 wrench
through an aperture in the body panel.
– Remove headlight forward out of body aperture.

Installing headlight
Install in the reverse order of removal, observing the following:
– Tighten all bolt to torque specified in assembly overview
⇒ page 135 .
– Perform functional check.
– Check installation position so that shut lines/gaps around
headlight are even.
If the shut lines/gaps around the headlight are uneven, the instal‐
lation position must be adjusted ⇒ page 145 .
Note
If a headlight is removed, the basic setting of the headlight should

always be checked when reinstalling ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ;
Descriptions of work .
– Check headlight adjustment, and adjust headlight if necessary

Removing headlight holder
Note
♦ The following illustrations show how to remove the right head‐

light.
♦ Removal and installation of the left headlight are carried out in
the same way.
– Remove headlight ⇒ page 139 .
– Undo bolt -1- of washing fluid reservoir.

– Detach headlight holder -2- from its locking mechanism
-arrow- pull it laterally off support plate in -direction of arrow-.
Installing headlight holder
1. Headlights 141
– When tightening bolt, make sure that the threaded sleeve for
fastening the headlight is horizontal.
1.2.2 Removing and installing headlights -

MX1- / -MX2- , headlights with gas dis‐
charge bulb
WARNING
♦ Never change bulbs if you are not familiar with the appro‐
priate procedures, safety precautions and tools.
– If repairs are to be made to the headlights with gas discharge

bulbs, observe the following:
♦ Notes on dangerous high voltage/currents ⇒ page 142
♦ Notes on pressure, temperature and radiation/arcs
⇒ page 143
♦ Assembly notes for gas discharge bulbs ⇒ page 144
♦ Disposal regulations for gas discharge bulbs ⇒ page 144
♦ Safety goggles
♦ Gloves
Note on dangerous high voltage/currents
WARNING
Control units for light systems, connectors and components

pertaining to bulb holders conduct lethally high voltage.
Operating the control unit and the starter unit is permitted only
with the bulb fitted.

WARNING
• Switch off ignition and all electrical loads, and pull out ig‐
nition key.
• When working on the headlight system, ensure that there
is no voltage in any component, including dissipation of
residual voltage after the headlights are switched off.
• Residual voltage can be dissipated by turning the dipped
beams on and then off again after withdrawing the ignition
key.
• When working on the headlight system, ensure that the
lights cannot be switched on.
Notes on pressure temperature and radiation/arcs
WARNING
• The bulbs may be operated in the headlight housing only

(protection against contact due to very hot bulbs, absorp‐
tion of UV radiation, avoidance of dazzling light, protection
against explosion).
• The glass of the bulbs can become very hot - danger of
burns!
• Avoid looking directly into the light beam as the UV radi‐
ation from the gas discharge bulb is about 2.5 times
greater than from normal halogen bulbs.
• Avoid looking into the light beam (danger of glare); other‐
wise vision may be impaired for a substantial length of
time.
WARNING
• Avoid contact with burst glass bulbs.

• H7 bulbs and gas discharge bulbs (xenon and bi-xenon)
are under pressure and can explode while being changed
- danger of injury.
• Always wear eye protection and gloves when removing
and installing gas discharge lamps!
1. Headlights 143
Assembly notes for gas discharge bulbs
Caution
♦ Before renewing a bulb, always switch off the concerned

electrical consumer.
♦ Switch off ignition and all electrical loads, and pull out ig‐
nition key.
♦ Do not touch the bulb glass with bare fingers. Use clean
fabric gloves. When the light bulb is switched on, the heat
would vaporise the oil of the finger prints which would then
settle on the reflector, impairing the brightness of the
headlight.
♦ A light bulb must always be renewed with a bulb of the
same sort. The designation appears on the base of the
bulb or on the bulb glass.
♦ Properly engage connectors during installation and the
connection is seated tightly.
Disposal regulations for gas discharge bulbs
WARNING
• Gas discharge bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous

waste; never dispose of gas discharge bulbs as consumer
waste.
• Gas discharge bulbs contain metallic mercury (Hg) and
traces of thallium; never destroy these bulbs.
• These components must be recycled in the correct man‐
ner according to national law.
• Only dispose of in containers intended for this purpose at
an authorised collection point.
Note
♦ Before working on headlight with gas discharge lights and

corning lights, always switch off the headlights and move the
ignition key to position 0 (locked).
♦ The automatic headlight range control and cornering lights on
headlights with gas discharge bulbs is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis.
the function and operation of the lighting system are first un‐
derstood.
Note
After measures that could influence the headlight setting, check

the headlight setting and correct it, if necessary ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet ; Work descriptions .

Self-study programme ⇒ Self-study programme No. 335 ; The

Cornering Light System
Self-study Programme ⇒ Self-study programme No. 488 ; The
Passat 2011
tions
The headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights
(AFS = Adaptive Front Lighting System) have a “bi-xenon” func‐
tion.
With conventional “xenon” headlights, the gas discharge bulb only
generates the dipped beam. The “bi-xenon” features makes it
possible to generate both the dipped beam and the main beam
with “one” gas discharge bulb. To achieve this, the dip beam
screen motor - V294- / -V295- uncovers the screened area of the
dipped beam on actuation of the main beam, thus producing main
beam light distribution.
This means that with “bi-xenon” headlights the main beam is al‐
ways automatically adjusted together with the dipped beam.
The headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lights do
not have an “additional main beam”.
The automatic headlight range control, the cornering lights and
onboard supply control unit - J519- feature self-diagnosis to fa‐
cilitate fault finding for headlights with gas discharge bulbs and
cornering light.
Note
The “bulb failure” warning lamp in the dash panel lights up when
the headlight range control or the AFS (adaptive front lighting
system) malfunctions.
Removing and installing headlight

Headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering light are re‐
moved and installed in the same way as halogen headlights.
– Removing and installing headlights ⇒ page 139 .
1.3 Adjusting headlights -MX1- / -MX2-

Adjusting headlights ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of
work
1.4 Adjusting headlight installation position

1. Headlights 145
Note
♦ The diagrams show how to correct the position of the left

headlight.
♦ The position of the right headlight is corrected in the same way.
If the position of the headlight is checked and it is found that the

shut lines/gaps between headlight and body are uneven, the in‐
stallation position must be corrected.
diator grille .
bumper .
– Loosen the two securing bolts -arrows- inside and at bottom
of headlight.
– Loosen the two securing bolts -arrows- inside and at top of

headlight.

– Adjust shut lines/flushness to body by pushing in or pulling out

alignment bush -arrow- on headlight.
– Check headlight installation position again to ensure gaps are
even; correct if necessary.
– Install front bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
bumper .
– Install radiator grille ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
diator grille .
Note
If a headlight is removed or adjusted to fit more accurately to the

vehicle body, it must be aligned following such measures.

1.5 Removing and installing front turn signal

bulb -M5- / -M7-
⇒ “1.5.1 Removing and installing front turn signal bulb M5 / M7 ,
H7 headlight”, page 147
⇒ “1.5.2 Removing and installing front turn signal bulb M5 / M7 ,
headlights with gas discharge bulb”, page 148
1.5.1 Removing and installing front turn signal

bulb -M5- / -M7- , H7 headlight
Note
Front left turn signal bulb - M5- and front right turn signal bulb -
M7- can be checked by the final control diagnosis for the onboard
supply control unit - J519- .
Removing:
Note
♦ For reasons of clarity, the headlight is shown removed.

♦ The headlight does not need to be removed in order to install
or remove turn signal bulbs.
♦ The following diagrams show how to change the front left turn
signal bulb - M5- .
♦ The renewal of the front right turn signal bulb - M7- is carried
out in the same way.
1. Headlights 147
– Turn grip -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove it together with

the left turn signal bulb towards the rear and out of the head‐
light housing.
– Push turn signal bulb -1- into bulb holder, holding it by the grip
-2-, while simultaneously turning it anti-clockwise and pulling
it out of the grip.
Front turn signal bulb : 12V, PY21W
Installing:
– Insert turn signal lamp together with grip into headlight hous‐
ing.
– Lock turn signal lamp by turning towards right.
1.5.2 Removing and installing front turn signal

bulb -M5- / -M7- , headlights with gas
discharge bulb
Note
♦ Front left turn signal bulb - M5- and front right turn signal bulb
- M7- can be checked by the final control diagnosis for the
onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ The diagrams show renewal of the front right turn signal bulb
- M7- .
♦ The renewal of the front left turn signal bulb - M5- is carried
Removing:
– Pull cap -3- off headlight housing.

– Turn grip anti-clockwise -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove

it together with the turn signal bulb from the headlight.
– Press button -arrow- on grip and pull turn signal bulb -1-
straight out towards front.
Front turn signal bulb : 12 V, PSY24W SV
Installing:
Caution
Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the

cap. The ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the
headlight.
– Fit cap.
1.6 Removing and installing headlight dip‐

ped beam bulb -M29- / -M31-
Note
The left headlight dipped beam bulb - M29- and the right headlight
dipped beam bulb - M31- can be checked by the final control di‐
agnosis for the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
Removing:
Note
During removal and installation, place the radio remote control

ignition key in the vehicle's interior. This prevents the doors from
locking and possible independent activation of the “Coming
Home / Leaving Home” functions.
1. Headlights 149
Note

or remove headlight dipped beam bulbs.
♦ The following diagrams show how to renew the left headlight
dipped beam bulb - M29- .
♦ The renewal of the right headlight dipped beam bulb - M31- is
carried out in the same way.
– Twist cap -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove.
– Swivel bulb holder together with left headlight dipped beam

bulb - M29- -1- out of reflector starting at the bottom and re‐
move it from headlight.

– Pull left headlight dipped beam bulb - M29- -2- in

-direction of arrow- straight out of bulb holder -1-.
Headlight dipped beam bulb : H7 12V, 55W
Installing:
Caution
Make sure cover cap is correctly seated when installing. The

ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the headlight.
Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave
traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the bulb
is switched on and cause the glass to cloud over.
– First insert left headlight dipped beam bulb - M29- into recess
in reflector with the pin pointing upwards.
– Swivel in the bottom of the bulb until it engages securely.
– Screw on cover again.
1.7 Removing and installing headlight main

beam bulb -M30- / -M32-
Note
The left headlight main beam bulb - M30- and the right headlight
main beam bulb - M32- can be checked by the final control diag‐
nosis of the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
Removing:
Note

1. Headlights 151
Note

or remove headlight bulbs.
♦ The following diagrams show how to renew the left headlight
main beam bulb - M30- .
♦ The renewal of the right headlight main beam bulb - M32- is
carried out in the same way.
– Pull off cap -3-.
– Swivel bulb holder together with left headlight main beam bulb
- M30- -1- out of reflector starting at the top and remove it from
headlight.

– Pull headlight main beam bulb -2- in -direction of arrow-

straight out of bulb holder -1-.
Headlight main beam bulb : H7, 12 V, 55 W
Installing:
Caution

– First insert left headlight main beam bulb - M30- into recess in
reflector with the pin pointing downwards.
– Swivel in the top of the bulb until it engages securely.
– Fit cap again.
1.8 Removing and installing gas discharge

bulb -L13- / -L14-
WARNING
Observe operation and safety notes for gas discharge bulbs

⇒ page 142 .
Note
♦ The left gas discharge bulb - L13- and the right gas discharge
bulb - L14- can be checked by the final control diagnosis for
the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ The illustrations show how to replace the right gas discharge
bulb - L14- .
♦ The left gas discharge bulb - L13- is replaced in the same way.
Removing
1. Headlights 153
– Using suitable screwdriver, press wire clip -1- outwards and

remove covering cap -2-.
– Unfasten connector -arrow- and disconnect.
WARNING
♦ Within the glass part of a gas discharge bulb, pressure can

range from 7 bar (cold) to 100 bar (hot). Temperatures can
reach up to 700 degrees Celsius on the glass bulb.
♦ Should the glass bulb explode, there is a risk of injury from
burning.
♦ Always wear eye protection and gloves when removing
and installing gas discharge lamps!

– Hold the locking ring by the grips -1- and turn it anti-clockwise
in -direction of arrow- as far as it will go and then pull the gas
discharge bulb out of the rear of the reflector.
Gas discharge bulb : type D3S, 35W.
Installing
Note
♦ Do not touch bulb glass when installing a bulb. Fingers leave

traces of grease on the glass, which evaporate when the gas
discharge bulb is switched on and cause the glass to cloud
over.
♦ Do not expose glass of gas discharge bulb to mechanical
stress of any kind. The glass part of the bulb is extremely sen‐
sitive and is also under a high internal pressure.
♦ Avoid looking directly into the collimated beam as the UV ra‐
diation from the gas discharge bulb is about 2.5 times higher
than from normal halogen bulbs.
♦ Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the
cap. The ingress of water will cause permanent damage to the
headlight.
♦ If a headlight with automatic range control is removed, the ba‐
sic setting of the headlights is always to be performed after
installation ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .
Note
When inserting gas discharge bulb, make sure that the mounting
clasps on the reflector do not become bent.
– Insert the new gas discharge bulb and turn it to lock it in place.
– Attach connector.
– Fit covering cap and secure with the two wire clips.
– Install headlight ⇒ page 142 .
1.9 Removing and installing bulb for day‐

time running light/side light -M1- / -M3-
⇒ “1.9.1 Removing and installing side light bulb M1 / M3 , H7
headlight”, page 156
⇒ “1.9.2 Removing and installing side light bulb M1 / M3 , head‐
lights with gas discharge bulb”, page 157
1. Headlights 155
1.9.1 Removing and installing side light bulb -

M1- / -M3- , H7 headlight
Note
The left side light bulb - M1- and the right side light bulb - M3- can
be checked by the final control diagnosis for the onboard supply
Removing:
Note

Note

or remove side light bulbs.
♦ The following diagrams show how to change the left side light
bulb - M1- .
♦ The renewal of the right side light bulb - M3- is carried out in
the same way.
– Pull off cap -3-.
– Press the two locking buttons -arrows- and pull bulb holder
together with side light bulb -1- towards the rear and out of
reflector.

– Pull side light bulb -1- in -direction of arrow- straight out bulb
holder -2-.
Side light bulb : glass-base bulb 12V, W 5 W
Installing:
Caution

– Insert left side light bulb - M1- into reflector until it engages
securely.
– Fit cap again.
1.9.2 Removing and installing side light bulb -

M1- / -M3- , headlights with gas dis‐
charge bulb
In headlights with gas discharge bulbs, the LEDs for the daytime
driving lights perform the function of the side light. The LEDs for
daytime running lights cannot be removed.
1.10 Removing and installing headlight range

control motor -V48- / -V49-
⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing headlight range control motor
V48 / V49 , H7 headlights”, page 157
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing headlight range control motor
V48 / V49 , headlights with gas discharge bulb”, page 159
1.10.1 Removing and installing headlight range

control motor -V48- / -V49- , H7 head‐
lights
Note
♦ The following illustrations show how to remove and install the

left headlight range control motor - V48- .
♦ Removal and installation of the right headlight range control
motor - V49- are carried out in the same way.
Removing:
1. Headlights 157
– Unscrew cap -1- and pull cap -2- off.
– Pull regulator -arrow- out of headlight housing.

– Turn headlight range control motor -1- in -direction of arrow-
as far as it will go.
– Pull connector -1- off actuator.
– Swing ball head of the actuator -1- upwards out of the mount‐
ing in the headlight -2- and take actuator out of headlight
housing.
Installing:
– Insert headlight range control motor into headlight and attach
connector.

– Pull reflector towards rear.

– Swing ball head of headlight range control motor -1- from top
into mounting -2-.
– Insert the actuator into its mounting and lock it in place by
turning it clockwise as far as it will go.
– Insert regulator into the headlight housing.
Caution

– Install caps.
1.10.2 Removing and installing headlight range

control motor -V48- / -V49- , headlights
with gas discharge bulb
Note
♦ Left headlight range control motor - V48- and right headlight

range control motor - V49- can be checked by final control
diagnosis for cornering light and headlight range control unit -
J745- .
♦ The following illustrations show how to replace the right head‐
light range control motor - V49- .
♦ The left headlight range control motor - V48- is renewed in the
same way.
Removing:
– Press wire clip -1- outwards and remove covering cap -2-.
1. Headlights 159
– Pull regulator -1- downwards out of headlight housing.
– Pull off connector -1-.

– Turn headlight range control motor -2- anti-clockwise in
-direction of arrow- as far as it will go.
– Swing ball head of actuator -1- downwards out of the mounting

on the reflector -2-.
– Remove headlight range control motor.
Installing:
– Pull reflector towards rear.

– Insert headlight range control motor into headlight housing.
– Swing ball head of actuator -1- from bottom into the mounting
on the reflector -2-.
– Insert the actuator into its mounting and lock it in place by
turning it clockwise as far as it will go.
Caution


– Carry out basic setting of headlights ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ;
Description of procedure .

1.11 Installing repair kit for headlight housing

General description
If one or more headlight retaining tabs are damaged or broken
off, they can be renewed by fitting a set of repair tabs. There is
therefore no need to renew the entire headlight.
Note
♦ Before fitting, check that there is no further headlight damage

that would make repair tabs superfluous.
♦ The repair kits for the left and right headlights ⇒ ETKA (elec‐
tronic parts catalogue) are different.
♦ Each repair kit contains one top, one inner, one lower and two
rear headlight retaining tabs as well as the associated screws
for securing them.
♦ The shape of the rear headlight retaining tab is different for
halogen headlights and headlights with gas discharge bulbs.
Both types are provided.
♦ The following illustrations show the repair of the retaining tabs
on the left headlight. Repairs on the right headlight are carried
⇒ “1.11.1 Repairing upper retaining tab”, page 161

⇒ “1.11.2 Repairing inner retaining tab”, page 162
⇒ “1.11.3 Repairing lower retaining tab”, page 163
⇒ “1.11.4 Repairing rear retaining tab”, page 163
1.11.1 Repairing upper retaining tab


1. Headlights 161
– Remove residues of old headlight retaining tab -1- as shown

in illustration.
– Remove rib -2- on headlight housing in order to create more
space for the new retaining tab.
– Fit new retaining tab -2- with positive locking onto socket on
headlight.
– Tighten securing screws -3- to 1.0 Nm.
Note
If a headlight is removed, it should always be adjusted following

installation.

1.11.2 Repairing inner retaining tab


– Remove residues of old headlight retaining tab -1- as shown
in illustration.
headlight.
Note

installation.


1.11.3 Repairing lower retaining tab


– Remove residue of old headlight retaining tab -1- as shown in
illustration.
headlight.
Note

installation.

1.11.4 Repairing rear retaining tab
Note
♦ The shape of the rear headlight retaining tab is different for

halogen headlights and headlights with gas discharge bulbs.
♦ The repair kit contains both types of rear retaining tab.
♦ The following illustrations show how to repair the rear retaining
tab on a halogen headlight.
♦ The rear retaining tab on a headlight with gas discharge bulbs
is repaired in the same way.
1. Headlights 163

– Remove residue of old headlight retaining tab -1- as shown in
illustration.
headlight.
Note

installation.

1.12 Converting headlights from driving on

right to driving on left
⇒ “1.12.1 Converting headlights from driving on right to driving on
left, H7 headlights”, page 165
⇒ “1.12.2 Changing headlights over from driving on right to driving
on left, headlights with gas discharge bulb”, page 166

1.12.1 Converting headlights from driving on

right to driving on left, H7 headlights
Note
♦ To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic with asymmetrical lights,

both headlights should be converted to the direction of traffic
(driving on the left or right) relevant to the country in which the
vehicle is being driven.
♦ The headlight conversion set comprises 2 pieces of film.
♦ Conversion of the headlights is not designed as a permanent
conversion for other countries. It is only suitable as a “travel
mode” for a short stay abroad.
♦ Both headlights of a vehicle must always be converted.
♦ The details “right” and “left” on the masking film always refer
to the direction of travel when looking forwards from inside the
vehicle.
♦ Please note the different part numbers for the headlight con‐
version sets from right to left-hand traffic and from left to right-
hand traffic.
♦ Clean headlight lenses before conversion. After the applica‐
tion film has been pulled off, remove any remaining adhesive
from the lens ⇒ page 166 .
– Turn light switch to “0” position.

Left headlight:
– Remove protective film on back of application film -C- in area
-D- only.
– Align upper and lower edges of film -C- with the lines -A- on
the headlight lens.
– At the same time, align application film -C- in relation to the
radius -B- on the headlight lens.
– Press film in area -D- firmly onto headlight lens.
– Carefully pull application film -C- off the headlight lens.
– Masking film -D- remains on headlight lens.
Right headlight:
1. Headlights 165

-D- only.
the headlight lens.
Caution
♦ Risk of plastic erosion.

♦ If using solvent-based cleaners, the plastic lens of the
headlight could become damaged.
♦ To remove any adhesive residue on the plastic headlight
lenses, use only alcohol-based cleaning agents or those
with a diluted alcohol mix (isopropanol).
Note
♦ Remove any remaining adhesive using only alcohol-based or

alcohol and water-based cleaning fluid, e.g. a cloth soaked in
isopropanol.
♦ Customers should be informed of how to remove residual ad‐
hesive after the masking film is pulled off.
1.12.2 Changing headlights over from driving

on right to driving on left, headlights with
gas discharge bulb
Note
Additional information ⇒ Operating instructions .
The headlights have to be modified for driving in countries where

cars must be driven on the other side of the road. Retrofitting
headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lighting is car‐
ried out by means of the combi-instrument menu:
– Select “Settings” menu option in dash panel insert
– Tick “Travel mode” checkbox.
Headlights of left-hand drive vehicle will be converted for driving
on left when checkbox is ticked. It is only permissible to use the
Travel mode for a short time.
1.13 Converting headlights from driving on

left to driving on right
⇒ “1.13.1 Converting headlights from driving on left to driving on
right, H7 headlights”, page 167

⇒ “1.13.2 Changing headlights over from driving on left to driving

on right, headlights with gas discharge bulb”, page 168
1.13.1 Converting headlights from driving on

left to driving on right, H7 headlights
Note
♦ To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic with asymmetrical lights,

both headlights should be converted to the direction of traffic
(driving on the left or right) relevant to the country in which the
vehicle is being driven.
♦ The headlight conversion set comprises 2 pieces of film.
♦ Conversion of the headlights is not designed as a permanent
conversion for other countries. It is only suitable as a “travel
mode” for a short stay abroad.
♦ Both headlights of a vehicle must always be converted.
♦ The details “right” and “left” on the masking film always refer
to the direction of travel when looking forwards from inside the
vehicle.
♦ Please note the different part numbers for the headlight con‐
version sets from right to left-hand traffic and from left to right-
hand traffic.
♦ Clean headlight lenses before conversion. After the applica‐
tion film has been pulled off, remove any remaining adhesive
from the lens ⇒ page 168 .
– Turn light switch to “0” position.

Left headlight:
-D- only.
the headlight lens.
Right headlight:
1. Headlights 167

-D- only.
the headlight lens.
Caution
♦ Risk of plastic erosion.

♦ If using solvent-based cleaners, the plastic lens of the
headlight could become damaged.
♦ To remove any adhesive residue on the plastic headlight
lenses, use only alcohol-based cleaning agents or those
with a diluted alcohol mix (isopropanol).
Note
♦ Remove any remaining adhesive using only alcohol-based or

alcohol and water-based cleaning fluid, e.g. a cloth soaked in
isopropanol.
♦ Customers should be informed of how to remove residual ad‐
hesive after the masking film is pulled off.
1.13.2 Changing headlights over from driving

on left to driving on right, headlights with
gas discharge bulb
Note
Additional information ⇒ Operating instructions .
The headlights have to be modified for driving in countries where

cars must be driven on the other side of the road. Retrofitting
headlights with gas discharge bulbs and cornering lighting is car‐
ried out by means of the combi-instrument menu:
– Select “Settings” menu option in dash panel insert
– Tick “Travel mode” checkbox.
Headlights of right-hand drive vehicle will be converted for driving
on right when checkbox is ticked. It is only permissible to use the
Travel mode for a short time.
1.14 Removing and installing swivel module

position sensor -G474- / -G475-
The left swivel module position sensor - G474- or right swivel
module position sensor - G475- are located inside the respective
headlight and can neither be individually renewed nor adjusted.

In the event of damage, the headlight must be renewed

⇒ page 142 .
1.15 Removing and installing dynamic cor‐

nering light control motor -V318- / -
V319-
Note
The left dynamic bend lighting actuator - V318- and the right dy‐
namic bend lighting actuator - V319- can be checked by the final
control diagnosis for the control unit for bend lighting and head‐
light range control - J745- .
The left dynamic bend lighting actuator - V318- or right dynamic

bend lighting actuator - V319- are located inside the respective
headlight and must not be removed.
In the event of damage, the headlight must be renewed
⇒ page 142 .
1.16 Removing and installing gas discharge

bulb control unit -J343- / -J344-
Note
♦ The left gas discharge bulb control unit - J343- or right gas
discharge bulb control unit - J344- is not capable of self-diag‐
nosis.
♦ The illustrations show how to replace the right gas discharge
bulb control unit - J344- .
♦ Replacement of the left gas discharge bulb control unit - J343-
is analogous.
Removing:
– Pull gas discharge bulb control unit -1- straight upwards off the
headlight housing, taking connected wiring lengths into con‐
sideration.
1. Headlights 169
– Release and detach connector -arrows- and remove gas dis‐

charge bulb control unit -1-.
Installing:
Caution
Make sure seal is correctly seated when installing the gas dis‐
charge bulb control unit. The ingress of water will cause per‐
manent damage to the headlight.

1.17 Removing and installing output module

for headlight -J667- / -J668-
Note
♦ The illustrations show how to replace the output module for

right headlight - J668- .
♦ Replacement of the power module for left headlight - J667- is
analogous.
Removing:


– Pull the power module -1- straight upwards off the headlight
housing.
Note
The electrical connector for the headlight power module is de‐

tached at the same time when the power module is pulled off the
headlight housing.
Installing:
Caution
Make sure cover seal is correctly seated when installing the

headlight power module. The ingress of water will cause per‐
manent damage to the headlight.
Note
After a new output module for headlights has been installed, the
cornering light and headlight range control unit - J745- must be
coded ⇒ page 246 . Subsequently, basic setting of the headlights
needs to be performed ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions
of work .

1. Headlights 171
2 Fog lights
⇒ “2.1 Assembly overview - fog lights”, page 172
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing fog light”, page 172
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing fog light bulb L22 / L23 , cornering
light bulb L148 / L149 , daytime running light bulb L174 / L175 ”,
page 174
⇒ “2.4 Adjusting fog lights”, page 174
2.1 Assembly overview - fog lights
1 - Bumper, front
2 - Left fog light bulb - L22- or
right fog light bulb - L23-
❑ Bulb: H8, 12 V, 35W
⇒ page 174
3 - Left fog light bulb - L22- or
right fog light bulb - L23-
❑ Bulb: H8, 12 V, 35W
⇒ page 174
4 - Fog light housing
⇒ page 172
5 - Securing bolts
❑ 1.5 Nm
6 - Cover
7 - Screw for securing cover
❑ 1.5 Nm
2.2 Removing and installing fog light

The two headlights in the fog light housing perform different func‐
tions, depending on the vehicle's equipment level.
Vehicles with halogen headlights:
♦ Inner headlight: static cornering light
♦ Outer headlight: fog light and daytime driving light
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs:

♦ Inner headlight: static cornering light

♦ Outer headlight: fog light
The onboard supply control unit - J519- features self-diagnosis to
facilitate fault finding.
The operation of the fog lights can be checked using the final
control diagnosis feature of the onboard supply control unit -
J519- .
Note
The illustrations show removal and installation of the front left fog
light. The removal of the front right fog light is basically a mirror
image.
Removing:
– Remove securing bolt -1-.
– Unclip cover cap -2- from bumper cover at catches -arrows-
starting from the inside.
– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows-.

– Swing out fog light housing -1- from bumper, taking connected
wiring lengths into consideration.
2. Fog lights 173

– Release and disconnect electrical connectors -1-.

– Unclip wiring harness from wire securing clamp -arrow- and
remove fog light housing -2-.
Installing:
Note
♦ When installing, make sure that the connector with the longer
wiring harness is attached to the outer bulb.
♦ Clip the part of the wiring harness enclosed in a sleeve into
the wire securing clamp on the rear of the fog light housing.
– Tighten screw to torque specified in assembly overview

⇒ page 172 .
– Check fog light settings, and adjust if necessary ⇒ Mainte‐
nance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .
2.3 Removing and installing fog light bulb -

L22- / -L23- , cornering light bulb -L148- /
-L149- , daytime running light bulb -
L174- / -L175-
Note
♦ Illustration shows removal and installation on left fog light.

♦ Removal and installation of the right fog light bulb are carried
out in basically the same way.
Removing:
– Remove fog light ⇒ page 172 .
– Turn respective fog light bulb -1- in direction of arrow and re‐
move it from fog light housing.
The fog light bulb is permanently attached to the bulb holder and
cannot be renewed separately.
Fog light bulb : H8 12V, 35 W
Installing:
– Check fog light setting and adjust if necessary ⇒ page 174 .
2.4 Adjusting fog lights

Adjusting fog lights ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of
work

3 Lights in exterior mirror

⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview - lights in exterior mirror”, page 175
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing entry light in exterior mirror W52 /
W53 ”, page 175
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing turn signal repeater bulb L131 /
L132 , entry light in exterior mirror W52 / W53 ”, page 175
3.1 Assembly overview - lights in exterior

mirror
1 - Driver side turn signal repeater bulb - L131- or front passenger
side turn signal repeater bulb - L132-
2 - Driver side entry light in exterior mirror - W52- or front pas‐
senger side entry light in exterior mirror - W53-
3.2 Removing and installing entry light in ex‐

terior mirror -W52- / -W53-
Note
The operation of the entry light in exterior mirror can be checked

by means of the final control diagnostic function of the respective
door control unit.
Removing:
– Remove entry light in exterior mirror ⇒ page 175
– Pull glass-base bulb -1- in direction of arrow out of bulb holder
-2-.
Glass-base bulb: 12V, 6W
Installing:
3.3 Removing and installing turn signal re‐

peater bulb -L131- / -L132- , entry light
in exterior mirror -W52- / -W53-
Additional information: ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault
finding and Fitting locations
The driver door control unit - J386- or the front passenger door
control unit - J387- features self-diagnosis to facilitate fault find‐
ing.
3. Lights in exterior mirror 175


The operation of the turn signal repeater bulb and the entry light
in exterior mirror can be checked by means of the final control
diagnostic function of the respective door control unit.
The driver side entry light in exterior mirror - W52- and the front
passenger side entry light in exterior mirror - W53- are installed
in the left/right exterior mirror housing respectively.
The driver side turn signal repeater bulb - L131- and the front
passenger side turn signal repeater bulb - L132- are installed in
the left/right exterior mirror housing respectively.
The entry lights illuminate the entrance area around the opened
driver door or front passenger door when it is dark.
Note
♦ The turn signal light in the exterior mirror uses LEDs, which
cannot be replaced separately.
♦ In the event of damage, the complete turn signal light unit in
the exterior mirror must be renewed.
Removing:
Note

Note
♦ The removal and installation are only described for the left turn signal repeater. Removal and installation of
right turn signal repeater are carried out in the same way.
♦ The lower part of the housing and the turn signal repeater form one part.

Removing trim with turn signal

– Remove mirror glass ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 66 ; Exterior mirror; Removing and installing mirror glass .
– Remove mirror housing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66 ; Exterior mirror; Removing and installing mirror
cover .
– Remove trim ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ;
Exterior mirror; Removing and installing mirror trim .
– Release locking hooks -4-.
– Pull trim with turn signal repeater -1- off mirror mounting.
Removing entry light
The lower part of the housing must be removed to remove the
entry light.
– Slightly lift up entry light -2- -arrow a- and pull it off the lower
part of the housing -1- -arrow b-.
Installing
3. Lights in exterior mirror 177

4 Tail lights
⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - tail lights in body”, page 178
⇒ “4.2 Assembly overview - tail lights in rear lid”, page 179
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing tail light MX3 / MX4 ”, page 181
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing tail light MX5 / MX6 ”, page 185
⇒ “4.5 Removing and installing tail light cluster bulb”, page 188
4.1 Assembly overview - tail lights in body

⇒ “4.1.1 Assembly overview - tail lights in body, Saloon”,
page 178
⇒ “4.1.2 Assembly overview - tail lights in body, Estate”,
page 179
4.1.1 Assembly overview - tail lights in body, Saloon
1 - Securing bolt for tail light

housing
❑ 2 Nm
2 - Bulb carrier
3 - Tail light in side panel
⇒ page 181
4 - Left reverse light bulb -
M16- or right reverse light bulb
- M17-
❑ 12V, W16W
5 - Rear left turn signal bulb -
M6- or rear right turn signal
bulb - M8-
❑ 12V, PY21W
6 - Brake and tail light bulb
❑ Left brake and tail light
bulb - M21- or right
brake and tail light bulb
- M22-
❑ 12V, P21W
7 - Guiding element in side
panel

4.1.2 Assembly overview - tail lights in body, Estate
1 - Securing bolt for tail light

housing
❑ 2 Nm
2 - Tail light in side panel
⇒ page 183
3 - Left reverse light bulb -
M16- or right reverse light bulb
- M17-
❑ 12V, W16W
4 - Rear left turn signal bulb -
M6- or rear right turn signal
bulb - M8-
❑ 12V, PY21W
5 - Brake and tail light bulb
❑ Left brake and tail light
bulb - M21- or right
brake and tail light bulb
- M22-
❑ 12V, W21W
6 - Bulb carrier
7 - Guiding element in side
panel
4.2 Assembly overview - tail lights in rear lid

⇒ “4.2.1 Assembly overview - tail lights in rear lid, Saloon”,
page 180
⇒ “4.2.2 Assembly overview - tail lights in rear lid, Estate”,
page 181
4. Tail lights 179

4.2.1 Assembly overview - tail lights in rear lid, Saloon
1 - Securing nuts
❑ 3 Nm
2 - Tail light cluster housing
⇒ page 185
3 - Rear left fog light bulb - L46-
or rear right fog light bulb - L47-
❑ Only fitted on the driver
side, depending on the
equipment level
❑ Part of tail light housing
in rear lid
❑ LEDs, not removable
4 - Left tail light bulb 2 - M49-
or right tail light bulb 2 - M50-
❑ 12V, W5W, qty. 2

4.2.2 Assembly overview - tail lights in rear lid, Estate
1 - Securing nuts
❑ 3 Nm
2 - Tail light housing in rear lid
⇒ page 187
3 - Rear left fog light bulb - L46-
or rear right fog light bulb - L47-
❑ Only fitted on the driver
side, depending on the
equipment level
❑ Part of tail light housing
in rear lid
❑ LEDs, not removable
4 - Left tail light bulb 2 - M49-
or right tail light bulb 2 - M50-
❑ 12V, W5W
4.3 Removing and installing tail light -MX3- /

-MX4-
⇒ “4.3.1 Removing and installing tail light cluster MX3 / MX4 ,
Saloon”, page 181
⇒ “4.3.2 Removing and installing tail light cluster MX3 / MX4 ,
Estate”, page 183
4.3.1 Removing and installing tail light cluster

-MX3- / -MX4- , Saloon
4. Tail lights 181

Note
The function of the tail light clusters can be checked using the
final control diagnosis feature of the onboard supply control unit
- J519- .

The rear fog light on the driver side uses light emitting diodes
(LEDs). Defective light emitting diodes cannot be renewed. The
rest of the lighting in the tail light cluster has replaceable bulbs.
Removing:
Note
The illustrations show how to remove and install the cluster on

the left-hand side. Removal and installation on the right-hand side
are carried out analogously (mirror image of left-hand side).

Note

ignition key in the vehicle's interior to prevent the doors from lock‐
ing and possible independent activation of the “Coming Home /
Leaving Home” functions.

– Open service flap -1- in side panel trim.
– Pull primary locking mechanism -arrow- and release and de‐

tach connector.
– Undo bolt -1- and remove tail light cluster by taking it towards
the rear out of the side panel.
Installing:
– Insert connector so that it engages audibly and push in the
primary locking mechanism.
– When fitting tail light housing into aperture in body, insert it into
the guide in side panel ⇒ Item 7 (page 178) .
– Push tail light housing downwards onto contact for installation
aperture.
– Tighten bolt to torque specified in assembly overview
⇒ page 178 .
– When installation is complete, check gaps of tail light cluster
to body.

-MX3- / -MX4- , Estate
The tail light cluster in the side panel cannot be dismantled. It

comprises the following components:
♦ Left tail light bulb - M4- or right tail light bulb - M2-
♦ Left brake light bulb - M9- or right brake light bulb - M10-
♦ Rear left turn signal bulb - M6- or rear right turn signal bulb -
M8-
4. Tail lights 183

Note
- J519- .

Removing:
Note


Note

– Open service flap -1- in side panel trim.

– Pull primary locking mechanism and release and detach con‐

nector -arrow-.
– Undo bolt -1- and remove tail light cluster by taking it towards
the rear out of the side panel.
Installing:
– When fitting tail light housing into aperture in body, insert it into
the guide in side panel ⇒ Item 7 (page 179) .
– Push tail light housing downwards onto contact for installation
aperture.
– Tighten bolt to torque specified in assembly overview
⇒ page 179 .
to body.
4.4 Removing and installing tail light -MX5- /

-MX6-
⇒ “4.4.1 Removing and installing tail light cluster MX5 / MX6 , rear
lid, Saloon”, page 185
⇒ “4.4.2 Removing and installing tail light cluster MX5 / MX6 , rear
lid, Estate”, page 187

-MX5- / -MX6- , rear lid, Saloon
Note
- J519- .

4. Tail lights 185


Note

Removing:
Note

ignition key in the vehicle's interior to prevent the doors from lock‐
ing and possible independent activation of the “Coming Home /
Leaving Home” functions.

– Remove service flap -1- from trim -2- in -direction of arrow-.

nector -arrow-.
– Undo nuts -1- and remove tail light cluster from rear lid.
Installing:
– Fit tail light cluster into aperture in rear lid.
– Push tail light cluster upwards and towards centre of vehicle.

– First tighten the outer nuts and then the inner ones -1- to torque
specified in assembly overview ⇒ page 180 .
to body.

-MX5- / -MX6- , rear lid, Estate
Note
- J519- .

Note

Removing:
4. Tail lights 187

– Remove service flap -1- from trim in rear lid in direction of ar‐
row.

nector -arrow-.
– Undo nuts -1- and remove tail light cluster from rear lid.
Installing:
– Place tail light cluster into aperture in rear lid and push into
upwards and towards the middle of the vehicle.
– First tighten the upper nuts and then the lower ones -1- to tor‐
que specified in assembly overview ⇒ page 181 .
to body.
4.5 Removing and installing tail light cluster

bulb
⇒ “4.5.1 Removing and installing rear turn signal bulb M6 / M8 ,
reversing light bulb M16 / M17 , brake and tail light bulb M21 /
M22 , Saloon”, page 189
⇒ “4.5.2 Removing and installing tail light bulb 2 M49 / M50 , rear
lid, Saloon”, page 189
⇒ “4.5.3 Removing and installing rear turn signal bulb M6 / M8 ,
reversing light bulb M16 / M17 , brake and tail light bulb M21 /
M22 , Estate”, page 190
⇒ “4.5.4 Removing and installing tail light bulb 2 M49 / M50 , rear
lid, Estate”, page 191

4.5.1 Removing and installing rear turn signal

bulb -M6- / -M8- , reversing light bulb -
M16- / -M17- , brake and tail light bulb -
M21- / -M22- , Saloon
Note
The illustrations show removal and installation for the left side.
The removal of the right side is basically a mirror image.
Removing:
– Remove tail light cluster in side panel ⇒ page 181 .
– Press four catches outwards in direction of -arrow- and re‐
move bulb carrier -1- from tail light cluster housing.
– Pull reversing light bulb -1- in a straight line upwards out of

bulb carrier.
– Push rear turn signal bulb -2- into holder, turn anti-clockwise
and pull out of bulb carrier.
– Push brake and tail light bulb -3- into holder, turn anti-clock‐
wise and pull out of bulb carrier.
1 - Reversing light bulb: glass-base bulb 12V, W16W
2 - Rear turn signal bulb: filament bulb 12 V / PY21W
3 - Bulb for brake and tail light: filament bulb 12V / P21W
Installing:
– When inserting bulb carrier into tail light housing, make sure
that all catches engage securely.
4.5.2 Removing and installing tail light bulb 2

-M49- / -M50- , rear lid, Saloon
Note

4. Tail lights 189

Removing:
– Remove service flap -1- from trim -2- in -direction of arrow-.

nector -arrow-.
– Turn bulb holder -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove it to‐

gether with the tail light cluster bulb from the tail light cluster
housing.
– Pull tail light bulb in -direction of arrow- straight out bulb holder.
Tail light bulbs -2-: glass-base bulb 12V, W5W
Installing:
– Connect tail light connector so that it engages audibly, and
push in primary locking mechanism.
4.5.3 Removing and installing rear turn signal

bulb -M6- / -M8- , reversing light bulb -

M16- / -M17- , brake and tail light bulb -

M21- / -M22- , Estate
Note

Removing:
– Remove tail light cluster in side panel ⇒ page 183 .
– Unscrew bolts -arrows- and remove bulb carrier -1- from tail
light cluster housing.
– Pull reversing light bulb -1- in a straight line out of bulb holder
in bulb carrier.
– Push rear turn signal bulb -2- into holder, turn anti-clockwise
and pull out of bulb carrier.
– Push brake and tail light bulb -3- into holder, turn anti-clock‐
wise and pull out of bulb carrier.
1- Reversing light bulb: glass-base bulb 12V, W16W
2- Rear turn signal bulb: filament bulb 12 V / PY21W
3- Bulb for brake and tail light: filament bulb 12V / W21W
Installing:
4.5.4 Removing and installing tail light bulb 2

-M49- / -M50- , rear lid, Estate
Note

Removing:
4. Tail lights 191

– Remove service flap -1- from trim in rear lid in direction of ar‐
row.
– Press catches on both sides of bulb holder -arrows- and pull

bulb holder -1- together with tail light cluster bulb out of tail light
cluster housing.
– Pull tail light bulb in -direction of arrow- straight out bulb holder
-2-.
Tail light bulbs -1-: glass-base bulb 12V, W5W
Installing:

5 High-level brake light

⇒ “5.1 Removing and installing bulb for high-level brake light M25
”, page 193
5.1 Removing and installing bulb for high-

level brake light - M25-
⇒ “5.1.1 Removing and installing high-level brake light bulb M25 ,
saloon”, page 193
⇒ “5.1.2 Removing and installing high-level brake light bulb M25 ,
Estate”, page 194
5.1.1 Removing and installing high-level

brake light bulb - M25- , saloon
Note
♦ The high-level brake light bulb - M25- uses light emitting di‐
odes (LEDs).
♦ The operation of the high-level brake light can be checked us‐
ing the final control diagnosis feature of the onboard supply

Note
♦ LED failure in high-level brake lights (not USA and Canada):

♦ The individual light-emitting diodes (LEDs) in the high-level
brake lights are comprised in groups of 4 LEDs and supplied
with current in groups.
♦ The high-level brake light is designed so that it can still meet
the legal requirements of the ECE regulations (Economic
Commission for Europe) should one of the LED groups fail to
operate. If a further LED group fails, these requirements are
no longer met according to the legislator.
♦ Due to the failure of one LED group, the intact LEDs are placed
under increased strain; it must be anticipated that further LED
groups will soon fail.
♦ If more than four individual LEDs in the high-level brake light
have failed, the high-level brake light must be renewed (repair
measure).
♦ The high-level brake light bulb - M25- cannot be dismantled.
♦ In the event of damage, the complete high-level brake light
bulb - M25- must be renewed.
The high-level brake light bulb - M25- is located on the top edge
of the rear window under the roof headliner end trim strip.
5. High-level brake light 193

Removing:
– Detach roof headliner end trim strip -4- and remove it down‐
wards.
– Carefully push high-level brake light bulb - M25- -3- in direction
of arrow out of retainer rail -1-.
– Remove high-level brake light bulb - M25- from vehicle.
Installing:
5.1.2 Removing and installing high-level

brake light bulb - M25- , Estate
Note
♦ The operation of the high-level brake light can be checked us‐

ing the final control diagnosis feature of the onboard supply
♦ The high-level brake light bulb - M25- uses light emitting di‐
odes (LEDs).

Note
♦ LED failure in high-level brake lights (not USA and Canada):

♦ The individual light-emitting diodes (LEDs) in the high-level
brake lights are comprised in groups of 4 LEDs and supplied
with current in groups.
♦ The high-level brake light is designed so that it can still meet
the legal requirements of the ECE regulations (Economic
Commission for Europe) should one of the LED groups fail to
operate. If a further LED group fails, these requirements are
no longer met according to the legislator.
♦ Due to the failure of one LED group, the intact LEDs are placed
under increased strain; it must be anticipated that further LED
groups will soon fail.
♦ If more than four individual LEDs in the high-level brake light
have failed, the high-level brake light must be renewed (repair
measure).
♦ The high-level brake light bulb - M25- cannot be dismantled.
♦ In the event of damage, the complete high-level brake light
bulb - M25- must be renewed.
The high-level brake light bulb - M25- is located in the rear lid,
above the rear window.

♦ Wedge - T10039/1-
Removing:
Note
When removing and installing components in visible areas, mask

off areas in which leverage tools are applied using commercially
available adhesive tape.

– To prevent damage to paintwork, stick a strip of commercially
available adhesive tape on paintwork of roof spoiler above
high-level brake light bulb - M25- .
Caution
Make sure the seal around the light is not damaged when re‐
moving the high-level brake light.
– Insert wedge - T10039/1- between upper edge of high-level

brake light bulb - M25- and roof spoiler as shown in illustration.
– Press brake light down using wedge - T10039/1- .
– Release upper locking lugs of brake light towards rear.
– Then take the high-level brake light bulb - M25- to rear out of
opening in the roof spoiler, as far as the connected wiring al‐
lows.
Note
If the high-level brake light bulb - M25- cannot be removed as

described, please contact the TSC or the importer.
5. High-level brake light 195


– Remove high-level brake light bulb - M25- -2-.
Installing:
Note
When installing high-level brake light bulb - M25- , ensure the seal
is seated correctly. Seal must not be kinked, damaged or form
loops.
– Fit connector onto brake light.

– Clip brake light back into roof spoiler, starting at lower edge.

6 Number plate light

⇒ “6.1 Removing and installing number plate light X ”,
page 197
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing bulb for number plate light X ”,
page 199
6.1 Removing and installing number plate

light - X-
⇒ “6.1.1 Removing and installing number plate light X , Saloon”,
page 197
⇒ “6.1.2 Removing and installing number plate light X , Estate”,
page 198
6.1.1 Removing and installing number plate

light - X- , Saloon
Note
The number plate light - X- can be checked using the final control
diagnosis function of onboard supply control unit - J519- .

Removing:
– Press retaining lug in -direction of arrow- and take number
plate light downwards out of the bumper cover.
6. Number plate light 197

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow-.

Installing:
following:
Note
Insert number plate light into bumper cover so that connector is

oriented to left side of vehicle.
6.1.2 Removing and installing number plate

light - X- , Estate
Note
The number plate light - X- can be checked using the final control
diagnosis function of onboard supply control unit - J519- .

Removing:
– Carefully lever out number plate light -1- from rear lid using a
suitable screwdriver -arrow-.
– Release and separate connector -1- and remove number plate

light -2-.
Installing:
following:
Note
♦ Insert number plate light into bumper cover so that connector

points to right-hand side of vehicle.
♦ Engage number plate light securely in body aperture.

6.2 Removing and installing bulb for number

plate light - X-
⇒ “6.2.1 Removing and installing bulb for number plate light X ,
Saloon”, page 199
⇒ “6.2.2 Removing and installing bulb for number plate light X ,
Estate”, page 199
6.2.1 Removing and installing bulb for number

plate light - X- , Saloon
Removing:
– Remove number plate light ⇒ page 197 .
– Turn bulb holder -1- in -direction of arrow- to unlock it and then
pull it out of number plate light.
Glass-base bulb: 12 V, W 5 W
Installing:
following:
6.2.2 Removing and installing bulb for number

plate light - X- , Estate
Removing:
– Remove number plate light ⇒ page 198 .
– Carefully pull glass-base bulb -1- out of bulb holder.
Glass-base bulb: 12 V, W 5 W
Installing:
following:
6. Number plate light 199

7 Entry and start authorisation system

⇒ “7.1 Assembly overview - entry and start authorisation system”,
page 200
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing front door exterior handle central
locking button E369 / E370 ”, page 204
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing rear door exterior handle central
locking button E371 / E372 ”, page 207
⇒ “7.4 Removing and installing interior aerial for entry and start
authorisation”, page 209
⇒ “7.5 Removing and installing luggage compartment aerial for
entry and start authorisation R137 ”, page 214
⇒ “7.6 Removing and installing rear bumper aerial for entry and
start system R136 ”, page 215
⇒ “7.7 Checking entry and start system aerials and sensors”, page
216
⇒ “7.8 Removing and installing rear lid power opening sender
G750 / G760 ”, page 217
7.1 Assembly overview - entry and start au‐

thorisation system
⇒ “7.1.1 Assembly overview - entry and start authorisation sys‐
tem”, page 200
⇒ “7.1.2 Assembly overview - rear lid power opening sender
G750 / G760 , Saloon”, page 203
⇒ “7.1.3 Assembly overview - rear lid power opening sender
G750 / G760 , Estate”, page 204
7.1.1 Assembly overview - entry and start authorisation system

The illustration shows the fitting locations in the Passat saloon.
The fitting locations in the Passat Variant are identical. Item
⇒ Item 4 (page 201) is not fitted in the Variant.

1 - Convenience system cen‐

tral control unit - J393-
❑ Fitting location: behind
glove compartment on
front passenger side
⇒ page 351
❑ Renewing and/or cod‐
ing convenience system
central control unit -
J393- ⇒ page 351
2 - Front passenger side door
exterior handle
The following components are
integrated into the front pas‐
senger side door exterior han‐
dle:
♦ Front passenger exterior
door handle central locking
button - E370-
♦ Front passenger door exte‐
rior handle contact sensor -
G416-
♦ Front passenger side aerial
for entry and start authori‐
sation - R135-
Removing and installing front
passenger side door exterior
handle ⇒ page 206 .
❑ Checking front passen‐
ger side aerial for entry
and start authorisation -
R135- ⇒ page 216
3 - Rear right door exterior han‐
dle
The following components are integrated into the rear right door exterior handle, depending on the equipment
level:
♦ Rear right exterior door handle central locking button - E372-
♦ Contact sensor for rear right exterior door handle - G418-
❑ Removing and installing rear right door exterior handle ⇒ page 208
❑ Checking rear right door exterior door handle contact sensor - G418- ⇒ page 216 .
4 - Interior aerial 3 for entry and start authorisation - R154-
Note
Entry and start authorisation aerial 3

in interior - R154- is only installed in
the Passat saloon (not installed in
Passat Variant).
❑ Location in saloon: under rear shelf
❑ Checking entry and start authorisation aerial 3 in interior - R154- ⇒ page 216
5 - Rear bumper aerial for entry and start system - R136-
❑ Fitting location: behind rear bumper cover
❑ Checking rear bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136- ⇒ page 216
7. Entry and start authorisation system 201

6 - Luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation - R137-

❑ Fitting location: central in luggage compartment before the spare wheel recess
❑ Checking luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation - R137- ⇒ page 216
7 - Rear left door exterior handle
The following components are integrated into the rear left door exterior handle, depending on the equipment
level:
♦ Rear left exterior door handle central locking button - E371-
♦ Contact sensor for rear left exterior door handle - G417-
❑ Removing and installing rear left door exterior handle ⇒ page 207
❑ Checking rear left door exterior door handle contact sensor - G417- ⇒ page 216
8 - Driver side door exterior handle
The following components are integrated into the driver side door exterior handle:
♦ Driver exterior door handle central locking button - E369-
♦ Driver door exterior handle contact sensor - G415-
♦ Driver side aerial for entry and start authorisation - R134-
❑ Removing and installing driver side door exterior handle ⇒ page 204
❑ Checking driver door exterior handle contact sensor - G415- ⇒ page 216
❑ Checking driver side aerial for entry and start authorisation - R134- ⇒ page 216
❑ Fitting location: on rear section of centre console before the kick plate of the rear bench seat
❑ Fitting location: between the front seats on the centre tunnel

7.1.2 Assembly overview - rear lid power opening sender - G750- / -G760- , Sa‐
loon
1 - Sensor wires for rear lid

power opening sender
⇒ page 217
2 - Sensor for rear lid power
opening sender
⇒ page 217
3 - Coupling point in rear
bumper

7.1.3 Assembly overview - rear lid power opening sender - G750- / -G760- , Estate
1 - Sensor wires for rear lid

power opening sender
⇒ page 217
2 - Sensor for rear lid power
opening sender
⇒ page 217
3 - Coupling point in rear
bumper
7.2 Removing and installing front door exte‐

rior handle central locking button -
E369- / -E370-
⇒ “7.2.1 Removing and installing driver door exterior handle cen‐
tral locking button E369 ”, page 204
⇒ “7.2.2 Removing and installing front passenger door exterior
handle central locking button E370 ”, page 206
7.2.1 Removing and installing driver door ex‐

terior handle central locking button -
E369-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .

Note
⇒ Self-study programme No. 273 ; The Phaeton - Convenience
and Safety Electronics
tions
The entry and start authorisation system is equipped with self-
diagnosis which makes fault finding easier.
All faults concerning the entry and start authorisation system are
output via the convenience system central control unit - J393- .
The following components are integrated into the driver side door
exterior handle:
♦ Driver exterior door handle central locking button - E369-
Note
♦ In the event of a fault, the complete door exterior handle must

always be replaced.
♦ Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the
door exterior handle is replaced. Delete entry made in event
memory ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Find-
ing .
Removing:
– Remove front left door exterior handle ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 57 ; Components; Removing and
installing door handle .
Installing:

7.2.2 Removing and installing front passenger

door exterior handle central locking but‐
ton - E370-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note
tions
The following components are integrated into the front passenger
side door exterior handle:
♦ Front passenger exterior door handle central locking button -
E370-
♦ Front passenger door exterior handle contact sensor - G416-
♦ Front passenger side aerial for entry and start authorisation -
R135-
Note

always be replaced.
memory ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, Guided Fault Find-
ing .
Removing:
– Remove front right door exterior handle ⇒ General body re‐
Installing:

7.3 Removing and installing rear door exte‐

rior handle central locking button -
E371- / -E372-
⇒ “7.3.1 Removing and installing rear left door exterior handle
central locking button E371 ”, page 207
⇒ “7.3.2 Removing and installing rear right door exterior handle
central locking button E372 ”, page 208
7.3.1 Removing and installing rear left door

exterior handle central locking button -
E371-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note
tions
The following components are integrated into the rear left door
exterior handle, depending on the equipment level:
♦ Rear left exterior door handle central locking button - E371-
Note

always be replaced.
memory ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Removing:
– Remove rear left door exterior handle ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 58 ; Components; Removing and installing
door handle .

Installing:
7.3.2 Removing and installing rear right door

exterior handle central locking button -
E372-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note
tions
Use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester for fault finding.
The following components are integrated into the rear right door
exterior handle, depending on the equipment level:
♦ Rear right exterior door handle central locking button - E372-
Note

always be replaced.
memory ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Removing:
– Remove rear right door exterior handle ⇒ General body re‐
Installing:

7.4 Removing and installing interior aerial

for entry and start authorisation
⇒ “7.4.1 Removing and installing interior aerial 1 for entry and
start authorisation R138 ”, page 209
7.4.1 Removing and installing interior aerial 1

for entry and start authorisation - R138-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note
tions
The interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation - R138- is
located between the front seats under the front section of the
centre console.
Note
Further coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if

the interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation - R138- is
renewed. Delete entry made in event memory ⇒ Vehicle diag‐
nostic tester.

Removing:
Note
The alignment and exact positioning of the aerials is essential for

their function. Before removing the antennas, mark the exact po‐
sitions and alignment of the antennas. Install the antennas at the
exact same positions and aligned in the same way. The thickness
of the adhesive pad on the aerials is a part of its functionality. Do
not use a commercial type adhesive to restick if the adhesive
bonding of an aerial is insecure. Install a new aerial with new ad‐
hesive pad in this case. Non observance will cause the KESSY
system to malfunction.

– Remove centre console ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Centre console; Removing and installing centre con‐
sole .
Note
The vehicle carpet is not shown in the figure for reasons of clarity.
– Release and detach connector -2- and undo the adhesive

bond of the interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation -
R138- -1-.
– Remove the interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation -
R138- -1- from the vehicle.
Installing:
following:
– Reconnect connector -2- to interior aerial 1 for entry and start
authorisation - R138- -1-, ensure it engages.
– Align and bond interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation
- R138- onto centre console in the position marked during re‐
moval.

Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note


tions
The interior aerial 2 for entry and start authorisation - R139- is
located on the rear section of the centre console, before the kick
plate for the rear bench seat.
Note

renewed. Delete entry made in event memory ⇒ Vehicle diag‐
nostic tester.
Removing:
Note


– Remove rear seats ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
72 ; Rear seats; Removing and installing bench seat / individ‐
ual seats .
– Remove rear sill panel trims sufficiently to fold rear carpet for‐
wards to gain access to interior aerial 2 for entry and start
authorisation - R139- ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 70 ; Trims, interior; Removing and installing sill panel trims .

Note
The vehicle carpet and the foam section are not shown in the
figure for reasons of clarity.
– Release and detach connector -2- and undo the adhesive

bond of the interior aerial 2 for entry and start authorisation -
R139- -1-.
R139- -1- from the vehicle.
Installing:
following:
– Reconnect connector -3- to interior aerial 2 for entry and start

authorisation - R139- -2-, ensure it engages.
– Press entry and start authorisation aerial 2 in interior - R139-
into foam section -1-.
– Align foam section -1- together with aerial to wiring guide -2-
on centre tunnel.
– Glue interior aerial 2 for entry and start authorisation - R139-
to centre tunnel.

Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note


tions
The entry and start authorisation aerial 3, in interior - R154- is
located under the rear shelf, close to the rear window sun blind.
Note

renewed. Delete entry from event memory ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
tester.
Removing:
– Remove rear shelf ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Trims, interior; Removing and installing rear shelf .
– Remove pieces of insulation -1- and pull out spreader rivets
-3-.
R154- -4- from the rear shelf.
Installing:
following:
Note
♦ The connecting wire of the interior aerial 3 for entry and start
authorisation - R154- of the flat wire is straight in delivery con‐
dition. Fold wire when connecting it, as shown in illustration
enlargement.
♦ Place all insulation pieces back in their original position on rear
shelf.

7.5 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment aerial for entry and start au‐
thorisation - R137-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note
tions
Fault finding ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
The luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation
- R137- is located centrally in the luggage compartment before
the spare wheel recess.
Note
Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the lug‐
gage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation - R137-
is renewed. Delete entry from event memory ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
tester.
Removing:
Note



– Remove luggage compartment floor ⇒ General body repairs,

interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Luggage compartment trims; Removing
and installing luggage compartment floor .
– Release and detach connector -2- and release adhesive bond
of luggage compartment aerial 1 for entry and start authorisa‐
tion - R137- -1-.
– Remove the luggage compartment aerial for entry and start
authorisation - R137- -1- from the vehicle.
Installing:
following:
– Before bonding, align aerial to the two marks -arrows- on edge
of spare wheel recess.
– Bond luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authori‐
sation - R137- within the marks so that the lower edge of the
aerial housing lies 4-5 mm above the upper edge of the spare
wheel recess.
7.6 Removing and installing rear bumper

aerial for entry and start system - R136-
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note
tions
The rear bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136-
is located behind the rear bumper cover.

Note
Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the rear
bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136- is renewed.
Delete entry made in event memory ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Removing:
– Remove rear bumper cover ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 63 ; Rear bumper; Removing and installing rear
bumper .
– Detach rear bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation -
R136- -1- from lower section of bumper cover, taking connec‐
ted wiring lengths into consideration.
– Release and detach connector -2- and then remove entry and
start authorisation aerial in rear bumper cover - R136- -1- from
vehicle.
Installing:
following:
– Reconnect connector -2- to rear bumper aerial for entry and

start authorisation - R136- -1-, ensure it engages.
– First insert rear bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation
- R136- -1- into mounting in lower section of bumper cover,
then push it into it's final position until it engages.
7.7 Checking entry and start system aerials

and sensors
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Note


tions
Following aerials and sensors for entry and start authorisation can
be tested with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
♦ Front passenger side aerial for entry and start authorisation -
R135-
♦ Rear bumper aerial for entry and start authorisation - R136-
♦ Luggage compartment aerial for entry and start authorisation
- R137-
♦ Interior aerial 1 for entry and start authorisation - R138-
♦ Front passenger door exterior handle contact sensor - G416-
Feedback for unlocking via entry and start authorisation system
Adapting feedback for locking via entry and start authorisation
system
7.8 Removing and installing rear lid power opening sender -G750- / -G760-

Removing:
– Remove rear bumper ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 63 ; Rear bumper; Removing and installing rear bumper .
– Unscrew bolt -2-.
– Pull control unit for rear lid power opening sender -1- off spoil‐
er.
– Release cable ties -5-, and remove sensor wires for rear lid
power opening sender.
Installing:
– If necessary, renew cable ties.
– Tighten bolt -2- to 2.2 Nm ± 0.4 Nm.
– Ensure that connectors are securely engaged.

8 Steering column switch module

(SCSM)
⇒ “8.1 Assembly overview - steering column switch module
(SCSM)”, page 219
⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing steering column switch module
(SCSM)”, page 220
⇒ “8.3 Removing and installing steering column electronics con‐
trol unit J527 ”, page 227
8.1 Assembly overview - steering column

switch module (SCSM)
The components of the steering column combination switch,
steering column electronics control unit and steering column
switch base are installed as 2 different versions depending on
equipment level (manufacturers: Valeo or Kostal). The visible
fastening of the steering column electronics control unit to the
steering column combination switch can be used to identify which
version is installed.
♦ Manufacturer: Valeo, 3 bolts
♦ Manufacturer: 1 bolt at bottom and 2 fasteners at top.
Note
Illustration of assembly overview shows Valeo version.
8. Steering column switch module (SCSM) 219

1 - Steering column electronics

❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 220 .
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 227
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 229
2 - Steering column combina‐
tion switch - E595-
❑ Note removal and instal‐
lation sequence
⇒ page 220 .
(manufacturer: Valeo)
⇒ page 221
(manufacturer: Kostal)
⇒ page 222
3 - Securing bolts
8.2 Removing and installing steering col‐

umn switch module (SCSM)
Caution
♦ To disconnect and reconnect the battery, the procedure

described in the workshop manual should be strictly ad‐
hered to ⇒ page 4 .
♦ The removal and installation of individual components of
the steering column switch must be performed in a speci‐
fied sequence ⇒ page 221 .
For removal of the complete steering column switch, including

base, the switch is dismantled and the steering lock housing is
also removed. For assembly of the steering lock housing, new
shear bolts are required.
Even if just one component of the steering column switch is re‐
moved or renewed, the sequence described as follows must be
adhered to.
Removing:

WARNING
♦ Danger of the triggering of the airbag!

♦ Improper action on airbag unit may result in the triggering
of the airbag!
♦ Comply with the safety precautions when working on the
airbag ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 00 ;
Safety instructions; Safety instructions for airbag .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Running gear, axles, steering; Rep.

gr. 48 ; Steering wheel; Removing and installing steering
wheel .
– Remove steering column trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Assembly overview -
steering column trim .
The components of the steering column switch are to be removed
in the following sequence:
⇒ “8.3.1 Removing and installing steering column electronics
control unit J527 , Valeo”, page 227
OR
control unit J527 , Kostal”, page 229
⇒ “8.2.1 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch E595 , Valeo”, page 221
OR
⇒ “8.2.2 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch E595 , Kostal”, page 222 .
⇒ “8.2.3 Removing and installing steering column switch base,
Valeo”, page 223
OR
⇒ “8.2.4 Removing and installing steering column switch base,
Kostal”, page 225
Installing:
8.2.1 Removing and installing steering col‐

umn combination switch - E595- , Valeo
Depending on equipment, the steering column combination
switch - E595- comprises the following components and cannot
be dismantled:
♦ Turn signal switch - E2-
♦ Windscreen wiper switch - E-
♦ Headlight dipper and flasher switch - E4-
♦ Intermittent wiper switch - E22-
♦ Washer pump switch (automatic wash/wipe and headlight
washer system) - E44-
♦ Intermittent wiper regulator - E38-
♦ Rear window wiper switch - E34-
♦ Multifunction display call-up button - E86-

♦ Cruise control system switch - E45-

♦ Cruise control system master switch - E51-
♦ Button to temporarily switch cruise control system (CCS) off -
E527-
♦ Reset button - E92-
♦ Cruise control system (CCS) SET button - E227-
Caution
The removal and installation of individual components of the

steering column switch must be performed in a specified se‐
quence ⇒ page 220 .
Removing:
Caution
The vehicle must not be moved with the steering angle sensor
removed as the steering rack may otherwise become dam‐
aged.

wheel .
– Remove steering column electronics control unit - J527-
⇒ page 227 .
– Unscrew both bolts -1-.
– Pull entire steering column combination switch - E595- straight
towards rear off steering column switch base.
Installing:
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- straight onto
guides on base of steering column switch until it securely en‐
gages.
– Install all components in reverse order of removal.

umn combination switch - E595- , Kostal
Depending on equipment, the steering column combination
switch - E595- comprises the following components and cannot
be dismantled:
♦ Turn signal switch - E2-
♦ Windscreen wiper switch - E-
♦ Headlight dipper and flasher switch - E4-
♦ Intermittent wiper switch - E22-
♦ Washer pump switch (automatic wash/wipe and headlight
washer system) - E44-
♦ Intermittent wiper regulator - E38-

♦ Rear window wiper switch - E34-

♦ Multifunction display call-up button - E86-
♦ Cruise control system switch - E45-
♦ Cruise control system master switch - E51-
♦ Button to temporarily switch cruise control system (CCS) off -
E527-
♦ Reset button - E92-
♦ Cruise control system (CCS) SET button - E227-
Caution

Removing:
Caution
aged.

wheel .
– Remove steering column electronics control unit - J527-
⇒ page 227 .
– Remove securing bolt -arrow-.
– Pull entire steering column combination switch - E595- -1-
straight towards rear off steering column switch base.
Installing:
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- straight onto
guides on steering column switch base.
– Screw in securing bolt -arrow- and tighten to 1.5 Nm.

umn switch base, Valeo
Caution


♦ Angle hand drill

Removing:
Note
To remove steering column switch base -2-, shear bolts -1- of

steering lock housing must be drilled out. New shear bolts are
required for subsequent installation ⇒ Electronics parts catalogue
(ETKA) .
Caution
♦ Ensure that all the components mounted on the base have

been removed before drilling out the shear-head bolts.
♦ The drilling operation can cause swarf to penetrate the
adjacent components resulting in damage and/or mal‐
function!
♦ Adhere to the specified sequence when removing com‐
ponents of the steering column switch ⇒ page 220 .
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .
Removing:
– Remove all components attached to base in prescribed se‐
The carrier can be removed once all the components mounted to
it have been removed:

– Drill out shear-head bolts -1- of steering lock housing -3-.
Note
Bolts M8 -1-, core diameter 6.8 mm
– Pull steering lock housing -3- and steering column switch base
-2- to rear off steering column.
– Remove steering lock housing from steering column switch
base.
Installing:
– Insert steering lock housing -3- into steering column switch

base -2-.
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- onto base
of steering column switch until it engages securely.
– Push preassembled unit consisting of steering lock housing,
steering column switch base and steering column combination
switch - E595- as far as it will go onto the steering column and
align with threaded holes.
– Secure steering lock housing -3- to steering column using new
shear-head bolts -1-.
– Tighten new shear-head bolts -1- until bolt heads shear off.

umn switch base, Kostal
Caution


♦ Angle hand drill

Removing:
Note
To remove steering column switch base -2-, shear bolts -1- of

steering lock housing must be drilled out. New shear bolts are
required for subsequent installation ⇒ Electronics parts catalogue
(ETKA) .
Caution
♦ Ensure that all the components mounted on the base have

been removed before drilling out the shear-head bolts.
♦ The drilling operation can cause swarf to penetrate the
adjacent components resulting in damage and/or mal‐
function!
♦ Adhere to the specified sequence when removing com‐
ponents of the steering column switch ⇒ page 220 .
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .
Removing:
– Remove all components attached to base in prescribed se‐
The carrier can be removed once all the components mounted to
it have been removed:
– Drill out shear-head bolts -1- of steering lock housing -3-.
Note
Bolts M8 -1-, core diameter 6.8 mm
– Pull steering lock housing -3- and base of steering column

switch -2- off backwards from steering column.
– Remove steering lock housing from steering column switch
base.
Installing:

– Insert steering lock housing -3- into steering column switch

base -2-.
– Push steering column combination switch - E595- onto base
of steering column switch and screw in lower securing bolt.
– Push preassembled unit consisting of steering lock housing,
steering column switch base and steering column combination
switch - E595- as far as it will go onto the steering column and
align with threaded holes.
– Secure steering lock housing -3- to steering column using new
shear-head bolts -1-.
– Tighten new shear-head bolts -1- until bolt heads shear off.
8.3 Removing and installing steering col‐

umn electronics control unit - J527-
control unit J527 , Valeo”, page 227
control unit J527 , Kostal”, page 229

umn electronics control unit - J527- ,
Valeo
Caution
aged.
The steering column electronics control unit - J527- comprises the

following components and cannot be dismantled:
♦ Airbag coil connector and return ring with slip ring - F138-
♦ Steering angle sender - G85-
The steering column electronics control unit - J527- is equipped
with self-diagnosis, which is designed to simplify fault finding.
Note
♦ If a new steering column electronics control unit - J527- is in‐

stalled, the inserted transport protection must be removed
before installation.
stalled, it must be coded ⇒ page 229 .
♦ In the event of faults in the steering column switch, the coding
of the steering column electronics control unit - J527- must be
checked ⇒ page 229 .

Removing:
Caution

WARNING

of the airbag!

Remove the following components in sequence (one after the
other):
wheel .


– Depending on equipment level, release and detach connec‐
tors -1-, -2-, -3- and -4-.
Note
Coil connector on steering column electronics control unit - J527-

must not be twisted from its centre position. The front wheels must
be in “straight-ahead” position.
– Remove the 3 securing bolts -arrows-.

– Pull control unit for steering column electronics - J527- to‐
wards rear off steering column switch.
Installing:
Caution
Turn signal switch reset lever can break when control unit is
being installed.
Turn signal lever must be in 0 position when control unit is in‐
stalled so that reset lever is not extended.
– Push steering column electronics control unit - J527- in a

straight line onto steering column switch.
– Screw 3 securing bolts of steering column electronics control
unit - J527- into steering column switch module and tighten to
1.5 Nm.
Coding steering column electronics control unit

umn electronics control unit - J527- ,
Kostal
Caution
aged.
The steering column electronics control unit - J527- comprises the

following components and cannot be dismantled:
♦ Airbag coil connector and return ring with slip ring - F138-
♦ Steering angle sender - G85-
The steering column electronics control unit - J527- is equipped
with self-diagnosis, which is designed to simplify fault finding.

Note

stalled, the inserted transport protection must be removed
before installation.
stalled, it must be coded ⇒ page 231 .
♦ In the event of faults in the steering column switch, the coding
of the steering column electronics control unit - J527- must be
checked ⇒ page 231 .
Removing:
Caution

WARNING

of the airbag!

Remove the following components in sequence (one after the
other):
wheel .


– Depending on equipment level, release and detach connec‐
tors -1-, -2-, -3-, -4- and -5-.
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow B-.
Note
Coil connector for steering column electronics on steering column

electronics control unit - J527- must not be twisted from its centre
position. The front wheels must be in “straight-ahead” position.
– Release the two catches -arrows A-.

– Pull control unit for steering column electronics - J527- to‐
wards rear off steering column switch.
Installing:
Caution
Turn signal switch reset lever can break when control unit is
being installed.
Turn signal lever must be in 0 position when control unit is in‐
stalled so that reset lever is not extended.
– Push steering column electronics control unit - J527- in a

straight line onto steering column switch until it engages se‐
curely.
– Screw in securing bolt of steering column electronics control
unit - J527- into steering column switch module and tighten to
1.5 Nm.
Coding steering column electronics control unit

9 Parking aid
⇒ “9.1 Assembly overview – parking aid”, page 232
⇒ “9.2 Removing and installing parking aid control unit J446 ”,
page 233
⇒ “9.3 Removing and installing front parking aid warning buzzer
H22 ”, page 234
⇒ “9.4 Removing and installing rear parking aid warning buzzer
H15 ”, page 235
⇒ “9.5 Adjusting volume and frequency of rear parking aid warning
buzzer H15 ”, page 236
⇒ “9.6 Removing and installing front parking aid senders G252 /
G253 / G254 / G255 ”, page 236
⇒ “9.7 Removing and installing rear parking aid senders G203 /
G204 / G205 / G206 ”, page 237
9.1 Assembly overview – parking aid

The Passat has an 8-channel-parking aid installed:
♦ 4 ultrasonic sensors (parking aid senders) in rear bumper
♦ 4 ultrasonic sensors in front bumper or radiator grille
The parking aid system monitors the surrounding area via the ul‐
trasonic sensors in the front and rear bumpers. The acoustic
distance warning is provided by 2 warning buzzers in the vehicle
interior.
The rear sensors are switched off automatically when a trailer is
hitched to the vehicle and the connector is plugged into the trailer
socket. The front sensors remain active.
The following illustration shows the fitting locations of the PDC
components in the Saloon. The fitting locations in the Variant are
similar.
The 8-channel parking aid comprises the following components:

1 - Parking aid senders in rear

bumper cover
❑ Rear left parking aid
sender - G203- in rear
bumper cover
❑ Rear centre left parking
aid sender - G204- in
rear bumper cover
❑ Rear centre right park‐
ing aid sender - G205- in
rear bumper cover
❑ Rear right parking aid
sender - G206- in rear
bumper cover
⇒ page 237
2 - Rear parking aid warning
buzzer - H15-
(saloon) ⇒ page 235 .
(Variant) ⇒ page 235 .
3 - Parking aid button - E266-
❑ With parking aid switch
illumination bulb - L117-
❑ Located in centre con‐
sole next to gear lever.
⇒ page 302
4 - Front parking aid warning
buzzer - H22-
⇒ page 234
5 - Parking aid control unit -
J446-
❑ Located above the relay carrier on driver side
6 - Parking aid senders in front bumper cover and radiator grille
❑ Front left parking aid sender - G255-
❑ Front centre left parking aid sender - G254-
❑ Front centre right parking aid sender - G253-
❑ Front right parking aid sender - G252-
9.2 Removing and installing parking aid

Note
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions
♦ ⇒ Self-study programme No. 488 ; The Passat 2011
9. Parking aid 233

Function:
The system performs a self-test after the ignition is switched on;
this is completed in less than one second. From this point on‐
wards the control unit is permanently operational and the distance
sensing function is active.
A brief audible signal is given and the warning lamp lights up when
the parking aid system is ready. If a fault is detected, a continuous
audible signal is given for 5 seconds and the parking aid warning
lamp flashes.
The intervals between the warning signals become proportionally
shorter as the distance decreases. At distances of less than 30 cm
the warning signals merge into a continuous tone. Special situa‐
tion: driving parallel to a wall = no signal
The parking aid control unit - J446- -arrow- is located in the driv‐
er's footwell, above the relay carrier. The park assist steering
control unit - J446- controls the functions of the parking aid and,
depending on the equipment level, also the functions of the park
assist steering system.
The parking aid button - E266- is located in the centre console
next to the gear lever. Removing and installing ⇒ page 302 .
Removing:
– Open and remove storage compartment in footwell on driver
side.
Note
For reasons of clarity, the location of the control unit is shown with
a partly dismantled dash panel.
– Loosen spreader rivets, release and detach connectors, and

remove parking aid control unit - J446- .
Installing:
Coding the parking aid control unit
The parking aid control unit - J446- can be set to suit the config‐
uration in a particular vehicle by coding it accordingly.
9.3 Removing and installing front parking

aid warning buzzer - H22-
The front parking aid warning buzzer - H22- is located under the
dash panel in the front left footwell and is secured on the console
for the relay carrier.
Removing:
– Remove end trim under dash panel in footwell on driver side
⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/

covers; Removing and installing dash panel end trim on driver

side .
– Remove the two spreader rivets -arrows-.
– Release and detach connector -1- and remove front parking
aid warning buzzer - H22- -2- from vehicle.
Installing:
Note
Coding, basic setting and adaption are not necessary if the front
parking aid warning buzzer - H22- is renewed.
9.4 Removing and installing rear parking aid

warning buzzer - H15-
⇒ “9.4.1 Removing and installing rear parking aid warning buzzer
H15 , Saloon”, page 235
H15 , estate”, page 235
9.4.1 Removing and installing rear parking aid

warning buzzer - H15- , Saloon
The rear parking aid warning buzzer - H15- is located on the right
under the rear shelf.
Removing:
– Remove rear shelf ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Trims, interior; Removing and installing rear shelf .
– Loosen spreader rivets -arrows-.
– Remove rear parking aid warning buzzer - H15- -1- from ve‐
hicle.
Installing:
Note
9.4.2 Removing and installing rear parking aid

warning buzzer - H15- , estate
The rear parking aid warning buzzer - H15- is located behind the
rear right side panel trim near the seat belt mounting.
Removing:
9. Parking aid 235

– Remove right side panel trim in luggage compartment ⇒ Gen‐

eral body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Luggage compartment
trims; Removing and installing side panel trim in luggage com‐
partment .
– Loosen spreader rivets -arrows-.
– Remove rear parking aid warning buzzer - H15- -2- from ve‐
hicle.
Installing:
Note
9.5 Adjusting volume and frequency of rear

parking aid warning buzzer -H15-
Adjusting pitch of front parking aid warning buzzer

aid senders -G252- / -G253- / -G254- / -
G255-
Note
Removal and installation of parking aid senders are carried out in

the same manner and are described only for one sender.
Removing:
Note
It is only necessary to remove the bumper to allow for the removal

of the senders if the front centre left parking aid sender - G254-
or the front centre right parking aid sender - G253- are installed.
To remove the front left parking aid sender - G255- or the front
right parking aid sender - G252- , the bumper does not need to
be removed first.

bumper .
– Release locking lugs -2- on sender retainer.
– Pull sender -1- with connector still connected out of bumper
cover.

Note
When removing the sender, make sure that the isolation ring
(black silicone ring) does not remain in sender retainer.
Installing:
following:
Note
♦ When inserting the sender in the sender retainer, make sure

that the isolation ring (black silicone ring) is seated correctly
on the sender head.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender retainer must audibly engage
when installing the sender.
9.7 Removing and installing rear parking aid

senders -G203- / -G204- / -G205- / -
G206-
Removing:
bumper .
Removal and installation of parking aid senders in the rear bump‐
er are performed in the same manner as for the front bumper
⇒ page 236 .
Installing:
following:
Note
♦ When inserting the sender in the sender retainer, make sure

that the isolation ring (black silicone ring) is seated correctly
on the sender head.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender retainer must audibly engage
when installing the sender.
9. Parking aid 237

10 Park assist steering

⇒ “10.1 Assembly overview - park assist steering”, page 238
⇒ “10.2 Removing and installing park assist steering control unit
J791 ”, page 239
⇒ “10.3 Removing and installing front sender for park assist steer‐
ing G568 / G569 ”, page 240
⇒ “10.4 Removing and installing rear park assist steering sender
G716 / G717 ”, page 242
⇒ “10.5 Removing and installing front parking aid warning buzzer
H22 ”, page 244
⇒ “10.6 Removing and installing park assist steering control unit
J791 ”, page 244
10.1 Assembly overview - park assist steering
Note
♦ When handling complaints, it is essential to understand the function and operation of the park assist steering.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's manual
The park assist steering consists of:

1 - Front park assist steering

senders
❑ Located in front bumper
cover
⇒ page 240
2 - Park assist steering button
- E581-
❑ Located in centre con‐
sole next to gear lever.
⇒ page 302
3 - Rear parking aid warning
buzzer - H15-
❑ Located in driver side
footwell, on left side of
dash panel behind relay
carrier
❑ Saloon: under rear shelf
on right
❑ Estate: behind side pan‐
el trim in luggage com‐
partment.
❑ Saloon: removing and
installing ⇒ page 235
❑ Variant: removing and
installing ⇒ page 235
❑ Adjusting volume
⇒ page 236 .
❑ Adjusting pitch
⇒ page 236 .
4 - Rear park assist steering
senders
❑ Located in rear bumper
cover
5 - Park assist steering control unit - J791-
❑ Located in footwell, above fuse box
❑ Securing bolt specified torque: 5 Nm
6 - Front parking aid warning buzzer - H22-
❑ Located in driver footwell beneath dash panel
❑ Adjusting volume ⇒ page 236 .
❑ Adjusting pitch ⇒ page 236 .
10.2 Removing and installing park assist

steering control unit - J791-
The park assist steering features self-diagnosis to facilitate fault
finding.
10. Park assist steering 239

To check the park assist steering as a whole, perform final control

diagnosis.
The park assist steering control unit - J791- is located in the driver
footwell above the fuse holder. The park assist steering control
unit - J791- controls the functions of the parking aid system.
Removing and installing control unit
Removing and installing park assist control unit - J791- and park‐
ing aid control unit - J446- ⇒ page 233
Code control unit
10.3 Removing and installing front sender for

park assist steering -G568- / -G569-
The following park assist steering senders are located in the front
bumper cover:
♦ Front left sender for park assist steering on left side of vehicle
- G568-
♦ Front right sender for park assist steering on right side of ve‐
hicle - G569-
Note
Removal and installation of the two front parking aid senders are
carried out in the same way and are described below for just one
sender.
Removing:
Caution
The order for removing the senders must be adhered to under

all circumstances.
The sender may otherwise be damaged. Fractures may occur
if too much pressure is applied to the sender, and this may
cause the sender to fail.
First remove the senders from the retainers and then discon‐
nect the sender's connector.

bumper .

– Release locking lugs -arrows- on sender retainer.

cover.
Note
♦ When removing the sender, make sure that the isolation ring
(black silicone ring) on the sender head does not remain in the
bracket or become lost.
♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all cir‐
cumstances.
– Release and separate connector -2- and remove sender -1-.

Installing:
following:
Caution
Function problems could occur if an incorrect or damaged iso‐

lation ring is used.
Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all circum‐
stances.
Replace any damaged isolation rings and make sure that the
right isolation ring is fitted in each case.
Note
As the front parking aid sender and the park assist steering send‐
ers have sender heads of different lengths, isolation rings of
different heights are also installed.
– Check whether the correct isolation ring is installed on the

sender head.
Type of sender Isolation ring height dimen‐
sion -B-
Front parking aid senders 5.7 mm
Park assist steering sender 9.05 mm
– Renew the sender isolation ring -1-, if necessary.
Note
♦ When installing the sender, ensure that the isolation ring is

correctly mounted on the sender head and does not ride or roll
up on insertion into the sender retainer.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender bracket must audibly engage when
installing the sender.

– After installing the sender, check that the sender is correctly

seated in the bracket. Visible on the outer side of the bumper,
dimension -a- of the ring gap between the sender head and
bumper cover must be even all around.
10.4 Removing and installing rear park assist

steering sender -G716- / -G717-
The following park assist steering senders are located in the rear
bumper cover:
♦ Rear left park assist steering sender - G716-
♦ Rear right park assist steering sender - G717-
Note
Removal and installation of the front parking aid senders and the
park assist steering senders is carried out in the same way and
is described as follows for just one sender.
Removing:
Caution
The order for removing the senders must be adhered to under

all circumstances.
The sender may otherwise be damaged. Fractures may occur
if too much pressure is applied to the sender, and this may
cause the sender to fail.
First remove the senders from the retainers and then discon‐
nect the sender's connector.

bumper .

– Release locking lugs -arrows- on sender retainer.

cover.
Note
♦ When removing the sender, make sure that the isolation ring
(black silicone ring) on the sender head does not remain in the
bracket or become lost.
♦ Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all cir‐
cumstances.
– Release and separate connector -2- and remove sender -1-.

Installing:
following:
Caution
Function problems could occur if an incorrect or damaged iso‐

lation ring is used.
Expanding the isolation ring must be avoided under all circum‐
stances.
Replace any damaged isolation rings and make sure that the
right isolation ring is fitted in each case.
Note
As the rear parking aid sender and the rear park assist steering
senders have sender heads of different lengths, isolation rings of
different heights are also installed.
– Check whether the correct isolation ring is installed on the

sender head.
Type of sender Isolation ring height dimen‐
sion -B-
Rear parking aid senders 5.7 mm
Rear park assist steering send‐ 9.05 mm
ers
– Renew the sender isolation ring -1-, if necessary.
Note
♦ When installing the sender, ensure that the isolation ring is

correctly mounted on the sender head and does not ride or roll
up on insertion into the sender retainer.
♦ Both locking lugs of sender bracket must audibly engage when
installing the sender.

– After installing the sender, check that the sender is correctly

seated in the bracket. Visible on the outer side of the bumper,
dimension -a- of the ring gap between the sender head and
bumper cover must be even all around.

aid warning buzzer - H22-
The front parking aid warning buzzer - H22- is located in the driver
side footwell, behind the left dash panel relay carrier.
Removing:
– Remove relay carrier on left of dash panel ⇒ page 234 .
– Remove the two spreader rivets -arrows-.
– Remove front parking aid warning buzzer - H22- -1-, as far as
the connected wiring allows.
– Release and disconnect connector -arrow- and remove front

parking aid warning buzzer - H22- -1- from vehicle.
Installing:

steering control unit - J791-
In vehicles with front parking aid or park assist steering, the park‐
ing aid functions are controlled by the park assist steering control
unit - J791- . Due to this reason, adaptations to the rear parking
aid warning buzzer - H15- in vehicles with front parking aid or park
assist steering are carried out via the park assist steering control
unit - J791- .


H15 , Saloon”, page 235
H15 , estate”, page 235

11 Automatic headlight range control

⇒ “11.1 Removing and installing cornering light and headlight
range control unit J745 ”, page 246
11.1 Removing and installing cornering light

and headlight range control unit - J745-
Note
The new control unit for cornering light and headlight range con‐
trol must be coded after installation ⇒ page 246 . The basic
setting of the headlights then needs to be performed ⇒ Mainte‐
nance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior;

Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing and installing
glove compartment .
– Swing locking mechanism in -direction of arrow-.
– Pull connector -1- off control unit for cornering light and head‐
light range control - J745- -2-.

– Remove cornering light and headlight range control unit -
J745- -1-.
Installing:
– Check functions of headlight.
Coding cornering light and headlight range control unit
Note
If the cornering light and headlight range control unit - J745- has
to be coded, basic setting of the headlights must be performed
after coding ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet ; Descriptions of work .

12 Towing bracket
⇒ “12.1 Removing and installing trailer detector control unit J345
”, page 247
12.1 Removing and installing trailer detector

Coding trailer detector control unit: ⇒ page 248

The trailer detector control unit - J345- is located behind the left
side panel trim in the luggage compartment.
Note

finding and Fitting locations, ⇒ Operating instructions
The trailer detector control unit - J345- detects the “trailer mode”
as of a power decrease of at least 5 W1), and transmits the cor‐
responding data to various control units via the CAN bus.
1) The “towing mode” can only be detected if at least turn signal indicators or side
lights are switched on.
Note
Use socket tester - V.A.G 1537/A- to check the control unit.
The trailer detector control unit - J345- features self-diagnosis to

12. Towing bracket 247

Note
♦ The trailer detector control unit - J345- is secured in place in

different ways, depending on the vehicle's equipment.
♦ In vehicles with battery in luggage compartment, the control
unit is attached to the bracket of the main fuse box and secured
with a bolt.
♦ In vehicles with battery in engine compartment, the control unit
is directly fastened to the body with two bolts.
Removing:
– Remove left side trim panel of luggage compartment ⇒ Gen‐
eral body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Luggage compartment
trims; Removing and installing side panel trims for luggage
compartment .
Vehicles with battery in engine compartment:
– Release and detach all connectors -2-.
– Remove both securing bolts -1-.
– Remove trailer detector control unit - J345- -3- from vehicle.
Vehicles with battery in luggage compartment:
– Release and detach all connectors -3-.

– Undo bolt -1-, pull trailer detector control unit - J345- -2- on
right out of holder and remove.
Installing:
Vehicles with battery in luggage compartment:
– During installation, first insert trailer detector control unit -
J345- into holder on right-hand side and then screw it in place
on the left-hand side.
Continued for all vehicles:
– Tighten securing bolts to 5 Nm.
Note
Following installation, a new trailer detector control unit - J345-

must be encoded ⇒ page 248 .
Coding trailer detector control unit


13 Lane departure warning

⇒ “13.1 Assembly overview - lane departure warning”,
page 249
⇒ “13.2 General description”, page 249
⇒ “13.3 Removing and installing front camera for driver assist
systems R242 ”, page 250
⇒ “13.4 Removing and installing windscreen heater for front sen‐
sors Z113 ”, page 252
13.1 Assembly overview - lane departure warning
1 - Front camera for driver as‐

sist systems - R242-
❑ Fitting location: in interi‐
or mirror bracket
⇒ page 250
❑ Replacing front camera
for driver assist systems
⇒ page 252
❑ Coding front camera for
driver assist systems
⇒ page 252
❑ Calibrating front camera
for driver assist systems
⇒ page 250
2 - Windscreen heater for front
sensors - Z113-
or mirror bracket
⇒ page 252
3 - Rain and light sensor -
G397-
or mirror bracket
⇒ page 111
4 - Steering angle sender -
G85-
❑ Fitting location: in steer‐
ing column trim behind
steering wheel
⇒ page 219
13.2 General description
Note
♦ When handling complaints, it is essential to understand the

function and operation of the lane departure warning.
13. Lane departure warning 249

⇒ Self-study programme No. 418 ; Lane departure warning
⇒ Self-study programme No. 416 ; The Passat CC
⇒ Self-study programme No. 340 ; The Passat 2006 - Electrical
System
tions
Use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester for repairs and troubleshooting.
Lane marking lines are recognised by a camera in the interior
mirror. If the vehicle approaches an recognised lane marking line,
the driver is informed that he is unintentionally leaving the lane.
This is done with a corrective steering intervention by the system
that helps to stay in lane.
The system is designed for driving on motorways and well devel‐
oped A roads. Therefore, the system only starts operation at
speeds above 65 km/h. If the lane departure warning system de‐
tects lane marking lines on both sides of the own driving lane, the
system is operational. This is indicated by the green warning lamp
in the dash panel insert. If, when the system is operational, you
switch the turn signal on before crossing a lane marking line, the
warning is suppressed as the system presumes that the lane
change is intentional.
Note
♦ The corrective steering intervention can, if necessary, be over‐

ridden by the driver.
♦ In driving situations that require a high level of attention from
the driver, we recommend switching the system off, e.g. dur‐
ing:
♦ Very sporty driving
♦ Poor weather conditions
♦ Poor road conditions or road works
13.3 Removing and installing front camera

for driver assist systems - R242-
Removing: ⇒ page 251
Installing: ⇒ page 251
Renewing front camera for driver assist systems: ⇒ page 252
Coding front camera for driver assist systems: ⇒ page 252
Calibrating front camera for driver assist systems: ⇒ page 252
Starter button - R242- is located in holder of interior mirror.
Note
If the front camera for driver assist systems - R242- is to be re‐

placed, the procedure for “replacing the front camera for driver
assist systems” must always be performed in order to read out
the codes stored in the unit ⇒ page 252 .

Removing:
– Remove interior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Interior mirror; Removing and installing interior mirror .
– Push retaining clip -2- upwards.
– Carefully pull front camera for driver assist systems - R242-
towards rear out of mounting.
– Then pull front camera for driver assist systems - R242- out of
its left mounting towards the right, taking into account the
lengths of connected cables and wires.
– Release and detach connector -1- and remove front camera

for driver assist systems - R242- -2-.
Installing:
– Push connector onto front camera for driver assist systems -
R242- until it locks into place.
13. Lane departure warning 251

– Insert protrusion -2- on left side on front camera for driver as‐
sist systems - R242- into mounting -1- on carrier plate.
– Then, push front camera for driver assist systems - R242- on
the right-hand side into the retaining clip.
– Install interior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
68 ; Interior mirror; Removing and installing interior mirror .
– Calibrate front camera for driver assist systems ⇒ page 252 .
Renewing front camera for driver assist systems
Coding front camera for driver assist systems
Calibrating front camera for driver assist systems
Calibration of the front camera is necessary for the following rea‐
sons:
♦ “No or incorrect basic setting/adaption” entry stored in the
event memory.
♦ Lane departure warning control unit - J759- with camera has
been renewed.
♦ Windscreen has been renewed or removed.
♦ Rear axle toe has been adjusted.
♦ Modifications, which may affect vehicle height, have been per‐
formed on vehicle running gear.
♦ On vehicles with electronic damping control or air suspension
vehicle level senders have been renewed.
Calibrating front camera for driver assist systems - R242- : ⇒
Running gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 44 ; Front camera for
driver assist systems; Calibrating front camera for driver assist
systems .
13.4 Removing and installing windscreen

heater for front sensors - Z113-
The windscreen heater for front sensors - Z113- is integrated in
the carrier plate stuck on the windscreen and cannot be renewed
individually. In the event of damage, the windscreen must be re‐
newed ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ; Wind‐
screen; Removing and installing windscreen .

96 – Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

1 Lights
⇒ “1.1 Overview of fitting locations - lights in dash panel”,
page 254
⇒ “1.2 Overview of fitting locations - lights in front doors”,
page 255
⇒ “1.3 Overview of fitting locations - lights in rear doors”,
page 256
⇒ “1.4 Overview of fitting locations - lights in luggage compart‐
ment”, page 256
⇒ “1.5 Overview of fitting locations - lights in roof trim”,
page 259
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing glove compartment light W6 ”,
page 259
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing bulb for glove compartment light
W6 ”, page 261
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing footwell light W9 / W10 ”,
page 261
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing footwell light bulb W9 / W10 ”,
page 262
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing front passenger side airbag de‐
activated warning lamp K145 ”, page 262
⇒ “1.11 Removing and installing Central locking SAFELOCK
function warning lamp K133 ”, page 264
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing entry light W31 / W32 / W33 /
W34 ”, page 265
⇒ “1.13 Removing and installing cigarette lighter illumination bulb
L28 ”, page 267
⇒ “1.14 Removing and installing luggage compartment light W3
”, page 267
⇒ “1.15 Removing and installing bulb for luggage compartment
light W3 ”, page 269
⇒ “1.16 Removing and installing illuminated vanity mirror W20 /
W14 ”, page 269
⇒ “1.17 Removing and installing vanity mirror light bulb L31 ”,
page 270
⇒ “1.18 Removing and installing front interior light W1 ”,
page 271
⇒ “1.19 Removing and installing centre reading light W39 / W40
”, page 271
⇒ “1.20 Removing and installing front interior light WX1 ”,
page 271
⇒ “1.21 Removing and installing bulbs for front interior light W1 ”,
page 272
⇒ “1.22 Removing and installing bulbs for centre reading light
W39 / W40 ”, page 273
⇒ “1.23 Removing and installing rear interior light W43 ”,
page 274
1. Lights 253
⇒ “1.24 Removing and installing rear reading light W11 / W12 ”,

page 274
⇒ “1.25 Removing and installing rear interior light WX2 , Saloon”,
page 274
⇒ “1.26 Removing and installing bulbs for rear reading light W11 /
W12 , rear interior light W43 , Saloon”, page 275
⇒ “1.27 Removing and installing rear reading light W11 / W12 ,
Estate”, page 276
⇒ “1.28 Removing and installing bulb for rear reading light W11 /
W12 , Estate”, page 277
1.1 Overview of fitting locations - lights in dash panel
1 - Left footwell light - W9-

❑ ⇒ “1.8 Removing and in‐
stalling footwell light
W9 / W10 ”, page 261
bulb W9 / W10 ”,
page 262
2 - Warning lamp for airbag de‐
activated on front passenger
side - K145-
❑ ⇒ “1.10 Removing and
installing front passen‐
ger side airbag deacti‐
vated warning lamp
K145 ”, page 262
3 - Right footwell light - W10-
W9 / W10 ”, page 261
bulb W9 / W10 ”,
page 262
4 - Glove compartment light -
W6-
stalling glove compart‐
ment light W6 ”,
page 259
stalling bulb for glove
compartment light W6 ”,
page 261
254 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior

1.2 Overview of fitting locations - lights in front doors
1 - Central locking SAFELOCK

function warning lamp - K133-
installing Central lock‐
ing SAFELOCK function
warning lamp K133 ”,
page 264
2 - Front left entry light - W31-
installing entry light
W31 / W32 / W33 / W34
”, page 265
3 - Front right entry light - W32-
W31 / W32 / W33 / W34
”, page 265
1. Lights 255
1.3 Overview of fitting locations - lights in rear doors
1 - Rear left entry light - W33-

W31 / W32 / W33 / W34
”, page 265
2 - Rear right entry light - W34-
W31 / W32 / W33 / W34
”, page 265
1.4 Overview of fitting locations - lights in

luggage compartment
⇒ “1.4.1 Fitting locations overview - lights in luggage compart‐
ment, Saloon”, page 257
⇒ “1.4.2 Fitting locations overview - lights in luggage compart‐
ment, Estate”, page 258

1.4.1 Fitting locations overview - lights in luggage compartment, Saloon
1 - Luggage compartment light

- W3-
❑ ⇒ “1.14.1 Removing and
installing luggage com‐
partment light W3 , Sa‐
loon”, page 267
installing bulb for lug‐
gage compartment light
W3 ”, page 269
1. Lights 257
1.4.2 Fitting locations overview - lights in luggage compartment, Estate

- W3-
❑ ⇒ “1.14.2 Removing and
partment light W3 , Es‐
tate”, page 268
installing bulb for lug‐
gage compartment light
W3 ”, page 269

1.5 Overview of fitting locations - lights in roof trim
1 - Driver side illuminated van‐

ity mirror - W20-
installing illuminated
vanity mirror W20 / W14
”, page 269
installing vanity mirror
light bulb L31 ”,
page 270
2 - Front interior light - W1-
installing front interior
light W1 ”, page 271
installing bulbs for front
interior light W1 ”,
page 272
3 - Rear interior light - WX2-
installing rear interior
light WX2 , Saloon”,
page 274
installing bulbs for rear
reading light W11 /
W12 , rear interior light
W43 , Saloon”,
page 275
4 - Front passenger side illu‐
minated vanity mirror - W14-
installing illuminated
vanity mirror W20 / W14
”, page 269
installing vanity mirror light bulb L31 ”, page 270
5 - Left centre reading light - W39- and right centre reading light - W40-
❑ ⇒ “1.19 Removing and installing centre reading light W39 / W40 ”, page 271
❑ ⇒ “1.22 Removing and installing bulbs for centre reading light W39 / W40 ”, page 273
1.6 Removing and installing glove compart‐

ment light - W6-
1. Lights 259
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-
Caution
When removing and installing components in visible areas,

mask off areas in which leverage tools are applied using com‐
mercially available adhesive tape.
Removing:
– Carefully prise out glove compartment light - W6- with removal
wedge - 3409- or a suitable screwdriver.

– Remove glove compartment light - W6- -1-.
Installing:

1.7 Removing and installing bulb for glove

compartment light - W6-
Removing:
– Remove glove compartment light - W6- ⇒ page 259 .
– Release locking lugs -1-.
– Remove heat shield -2- from lens of glove compartment light
- W6- .
– Carefully lever bulb out of socket.

– Glass-base bulb: 12V, 5W
Installing:
1.8 Removing and installing footwell light -

W9- / -W10-
Footwell lights:
♦ Left footwell light - W9-
♦ Right footwell light - W10-
Caution

1. Lights 261
Note
♦ The footwell lights are located in the trim below the dash panel.
♦ The footwell lights can be tested using the final control diag‐
nosis function of the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ Removal and installation of all footwell lights are performed in
the same manner and are described only for one light.
Removing:
– Use removal wedge - 3409- or screwdriver to carefully prise
footwell light out of trim beneath dash panel.
– Release and detach connector and remove footwell light.

Installing:
1.9 Removing and installing footwell light

bulb -W9- / -W10-
The footwell lights have LEDs, which cannot be replaced. In the
event of damage, the entire footwell light must be replaced.
1.10 Removing and installing front passenger

side airbag deactivated warning lamp -
K145-
WARNING
Comply with the safety precautions when working on the airbag

⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 00 ; Safety instruc‐
tions; Safety instructions for airbag .

Caution

Removing:
– Unclip radio trim at points marked with -arrows-.
1. Lights 263
– Carefully lever off trim -1- in lower area ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Dash panel; Removing and
installing dash panel decorative strip .
– Push apart both sides of locking mechanism in

-direction of arrows-.
– Remove front passenger side airbag deactivated warning
lamp - K145- towards rear from trim.

– Remove front passenger side airbag deactivated warning
lamp - K145- -1-.
Installing:
1.11 Removing and installing Central locking

SAFELOCK function warning lamp -
K133-
Note
The central locking SAFELOCK function warning lamp - K133-

can be checked by the final control diagnosis for the driver door
Removing:
– Remove door trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Door trims; Removing and installing front door trim .

– Unclip central locking deadlock function warning lamp -SAFE-

- K133- -1- by pressing locking lugs together -arrows- and
remove from door trim panel.
– Pull connector -1- off central locking SAFELOCK function

warning lamp - K133- -2-.
Installing:
1.12 Removing and installing entry light -

W31- / -W32- / -W33- / -W34-
Note
♦ Removal and installation of all entry lights are performed in the

same manner and are described only for one light.
♦ The entry lights can be tested by means of the final control
diagnostic function of the respective door control unit.
♦ Front left entry light - W31-

♦ Front right entry light - W32-
♦ Rear left entry light - W33-
♦ Rear right entry light - W34-
Renewing entry light bulb: ⇒ page 266
1. Lights 265
Caution

Note
Removal and installation of all entry lights are performed in the

same manner and are described only for one light.
Removing:
– Use a screwdriver or the removal wedge - 3409- to carefully
lever out the light.
– Release and detach connector and remove light.
Installing:
Renewing entry light bulb:
– Remove front entry light ⇒ page 266 .
– Carefully lever off lens from housing.

– Pull bulb -1- straight upwards out of the holder.

1.13 Removing and installing cigarette lighter

illumination bulb - L28-
The cigarette lighter illumination bulb - L28- is an integral part of
the cigarette lighter - U1- and can only be installed or removed
together with the cigarette lighter - U1- .
– Removing and installing cigarette lighter - U1- ⇒ page 332 .

partment light - W3-
⇒ “1.14.1 Removing and installing luggage compartment light
W3 , Saloon”, page 267
⇒ “1.14.2 Removing and installing luggage compartment light
W3 , Estate”, page 268
1.14.1 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment light - W3- , Saloon
Caution

Removing:
1. Lights 267
– Carefully prise luggage compartment light - W3- out of side

trim with removal wedge - 3409- or a suitable screwdriver.

– Remove luggage compartment light - W3- .
Installing:
1.14.2 Removing and installing luggage com‐

partment light - W3- , Estate
The luggage compartment light - W3- is fitted in the moulded

headlining in the middle above the luggage compartment.
Caution

Removing:

– Carefully prise luggage compartment light - W3- out of head‐

liner with removal wedge - 3409- or a suitable screwdriver
-arrow-.

– Remove luggage compartment light - W3- .
Installing:
1.15 Removing and installing bulb for lug‐

gage compartment light - W3-
Removing:
– Remove luggage compartment light - W3- ⇒ page 267 .
– Press contact plate -1- of light in -direction of arrow- and re‐
move filament bulb -2- from bulb holder.
– Festoon bulb: 12 V, 10W
Installing:
1.16 Removing and installing illuminated

vanity mirror -W20- / -W14-
1. Lights 269
Caution

The lights for the illuminated vanity mirror light on front passenger
side - W14- and the illuminated vanity mirror light on driver side
- W20- are built into the headliner behind the sun visors and are
switched on and off by sliding the vanity mirror hider.
Removing:
– Lever light out of headliner with the help of the removal wedge
- 3409- or a suitable screwdriver.

– Remove light.
Installing:
1.17 Removing and installing vanity mirror

light bulb - L31-
Removing:
– Remove illuminated vanity mirror light bulb ⇒ page 269

– Press contact plate -1- in -direction of arrow- and remove fes‐

toon bulb -2- from holder.
Festoon bulb: 12 V, 5W
Installing:
1.18 Removing and installing front interior

light - W1-
– Removing and installing
⇒ “1.20 Removing and installing front interior light WX1 ”, page
271 .
1.19 Removing and installing centre reading

light -W39- / -W40-
⇒ “1.20 Removing and installing front interior light WX1 ”, page
271 .

light - WX1-
Caution

Note
The following components (depending on level of equipment) are

integrated into the front interior light - WX1- :
♦ Front interior light button - E326-

♦ Driver side reading light button - E457-
1. Lights 271
♦ Front passenger side reading light button - E458-

♦ Front interior light - W1-
♦ Left centre reading light - W39-
♦ Right centre reading light - W40-
♦ Sunroof switch - E8-
♦ Sliding sunroof switch illumination bulb - L65-
♦ Telephone microphone - R38-
Removing:
– Carefully lever off trim -1-.
– Undo screws -1-, release locking lugs -arrows B- and take the
interior light out of the moulded headliner in
-direction of arrow A- as far as the wiring lengths allow.
– Release and detach connectors -1- and -2-.

– Unclip telephone microphone - R38- -arrow- in vehicles with a
hands-free system.
– Remove front interior light.
Installing:
1.21 Removing and installing bulbs for front

interior light - W1-
Removing:


– Remove front interior light ⇒ page 271 .
– Push contact plate -1- of front interior light - W1- in
– Remove festoon bulb -2- together with contact plate out of
mounting.
– Festoon bulb: 12 V, 10W
Installing:
1.22 Removing and installing bulbs for centre

reading light -W39- / -W40-
Note
The renewal of the bulbs is the same for both reading lamps.
Removing:
– Turn bulb holder in -direction of arrow- and remove.
– Carefully pull bulb out of holder.

Installing:
1. Lights 273
1.23 Removing and installing rear interior

light - W43-
⇒ “1.25 Removing and installing rear interior light WX2 , Sa‐
loon”, page 274 .
1.24 Removing and installing rear reading

light -W11- / -W12-
⇒ “1.25 Removing and installing rear interior light WX2 , Sa‐
loon”, page 274 .
1.25 Removing and installing rear interior

light - WX2- , Saloon
Caution

The following components are integrated into the rear interior light
- WX2- :
♦ Rear left reading light switch - E454-
♦ Rear right reading light switch - E455-
♦ Rear left reading light - W11-
♦ Rear right reading light - W12-
♦ Rear interior light - W43-
Note
♦ The removal and installation of all lamps is identical

⇒ page 275 .
♦ The buttons of the interior light cannot be removed by them‐
selves. In the event of repair, the complete component must
be renewed.
Removing:


– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove trim with lens of
interior light.
– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove interior light from

moulded headliner.

– Remove interior light.
Installing:
1.26 Removing and installing bulbs for rear

reading light -W11- / -W12- , rear interior
light - W43- , Saloon
Removing:
– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove trim with lens of
interior light.
1. Lights 275
– Carefully pull glass-base bulb -arrows- out of bulb holder.

Installing:
1.27 Removing and installing rear reading

light -W11- / -W12- , Estate
The rear left reading light - W11- and the rear right reading light -
W12- are mounted in the headliner.
Caution

Removing:
– Release catches of reading light -1- using removing wedge -
3409- or a suitable screwdriver.
– Remove light from roof trim, as far as the connected wiring
allows.

– Release and detach connector -arrow- and remove reading

light -1-.
Installing:
1.28 Removing and installing bulb for rear

reading light -W11- / -W12- , Estate
Removing:
– Remove rear reading light ⇒ page 276 .
– Slide cover -1- in -direction of arrow- out of reading light.
– Remove festoon bulb -1- from reading light.

Festoon bulb: 12 V, 5W
Installing:
1. Lights 277
2 Controls
⇒ “2.1 Fitting locations overview - controls in dash panel”,
page 279
⇒ “2.2 Fitting locations overview - controls in front doors”,
page 281
⇒ “2.3 Overview of fitting locations - controls in rear doors”, page
282
⇒ “2.4 Overview of fitting locations - controls in centre console”,
page 283
⇒ “2.5 Fitting locations overview - controls in luggage compart‐
ment”, page 284
⇒ “2.6 Fitting locations overview - controls in roof trim”,
page 286
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing light switch E1 ”, page 286
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing switch and instrument illumination
regulator E20 and headlight range control regulator E102 ”, page
288
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing electronic ignition lock D9 ”, page
288
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing hazard warning light button E229
”, page 291
⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing glove compartment light switch
E26 ”, page 292
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing key-operated switch to deacti‐
vate front passenger side airbag E224 ”, page 293
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing front driver side window regulator
button E710 ”, page 294
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing rear driver side window regulator
button, in driver door E712 ”, page 294
⇒ “2.15 Removing and installing front passenger side window
regulator button, in driver door E715 ”, page 294
⇒ “2.16 Removing and installing rear passenger side window reg‐
ulator button, in driver door E714 ”, page 294
⇒ “2.17 Removing and installing childproof lock button E318 ”,
page 294
⇒ “2.18 Removing and installing driver side button module”, page
294
⇒ “2.19 Removing and installing mirror adjustment switch E43 ”,
page 296
⇒ “2.20 Removing and installing driver side interior locking button
for central locking system E308 ”, page 297
⇒ “2.21 Removing and installing rear lid remote release button
E233 ”, page 298
⇒ “2.22 Removing and installing window regulator switch in front
passenger door E107 ”, page 299
⇒ “2.23 Removing and installing rear window regulator button
E711 / E713 ”, page 300
⇒ “2.24 Removing and installing electromechanical parking brake
⇒ “2.25 Removing and installing auto-hold button E540 ”,
page 301

⇒ “2.26 Removing and installing TCS and ESP button E256 ”,

page 301
⇒ “2.27 Removing and installing entry and start authorisation but‐
ton E408 ”, page 301
⇒ “2.28 Removing and installing shock absorber damping adjust‐
ment button E387 ”, page 301
⇒ “2.29 Removing and installing Start/Stop operation button E693
”, page 302
⇒ “2.30 Removing and installing rear roller blind switch E149 ”,
page 302
⇒ “2.31 Removing and installing tyre pressure monitor display
⇒ “2.32 Removing and installing parking aid button E266 ”, page
302
⇒ “2.33 Removing and installing park assist steering button E581
”, page 302
⇒ “2.34 Removing and installing switch module in centre console
EX23 / EX30 ”, page 302
⇒ “2.35 Removing and installing heated rear seat switch with reg‐
ulator E128 / E129 ”, page 304
⇒ “2.36 Removing and installing electric hinged tow coupling at‐
tachment button E474 ”, page 305
⇒ “2.37 Removing and installing luggage compartment light
switch F5 ”, page 306
⇒ “2.38 Removing and installing vanity mirror contact switch
F147 / F148 ”, page 306
⇒ “2.39 Removing and installing front interior light button E326 ,
reading light button E457 / E458 ”, page 307
⇒ “2.40 Removing and installing sliding sunroof adjustment reg‐
ulator E139 ”, page 307
⇒ “2.41 Removing and installing garage door operating unit E284
”, page 307
⇒ “2.42 Removing and installing interior monitoring deactivation
switch E267 ”, page 308
⇒ “2.43 Removing and installing bonnet contact switch F266 ”,
page 309
2.1 Fitting locations overview - controls in dash panel
2. Controls 279
1 - Switch and instrument illu‐

mination regulator - E20- and
headlight range control regula‐
tor - E102-
stalling switch and in‐
strument illumination
regulator E20 and head‐
light range control regu‐
lator E102 ”, page 288
2 - Electronic ignition lock - D9-
stalling electronic igni‐
tion lock D9 ”,
page 288
3 - Key operated switch to de‐
activate front passenger side
airbag - E224-
installing key-operated
switch to deactivate
front passenger side air‐
bag E224 ”, page 293
4 - Light switch - E1-
stalling light switch E1 ”,
page 286
5 - Warning lamp button -
E229-
installing hazard warn‐
ing light button E229 ”,
page 291
6 - Glove compartment light
switch - E26-
❑ ⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing glove compartment light switch E26 ”, page 292

2.2 Fitting locations overview - controls in front doors
1 - Central locking deadlock

function warning lamp on front
passenger side - K204-
2 - Driver side button module
❑ Consisting of:
❑ Front driver side window
regulator button - E710-
❑ Rear driver side window
regulator button, in driv‐
er door - E712-
❑ Rear passenger side
window regulator but‐
ton, in driver door -
E714-
❑ Front passenger side
window regulator but‐
ton, in driver door -
E715-
❑ Childproof lock button -
E318-
❑ Mirror adjustment
switch - E43-
installing driver side but‐
ton module”, page 294
3 - Rear lid remote release but‐
ton - E233-
installing rear lid remote
release button E233 ”,
page 298
4 - Window regulator switch in
front passenger door - E107-
installing window regu‐
lator switch in front passenger door E107 ”, page 299
2. Controls 281
2.3 Overview of fitting locations - controls in rear doors
1 - Rear driver side window

regulator button - E711-
installing rear window
regulator button E711 /
E713 ”, page 300
2 - Rear passenger side win‐
dow regulator button - E713-
installing rear window
regulator button E711 /
E713 ”, page 300

2.4 Overview of fitting locations - controls in centre console
1 - Electromechanical parking
brake button - E538-
installing electrome‐
chanical parking brake
button E538 ”,
page 301
2 - Rear roller blind switch -
E149-
installing rear roller blind
switch E149 ”,
page 302
3 - Shock absorber damping
adjustment button - E387-
installing shock absorb‐
er damping adjustment
button E387 ”,
page 301
4 - Start/stop operation switch
- E693-
installing Start/Stop op‐
eration button E693 ”,
page 302
5 - Tyre pressure monitor dis‐
play button - E492-
installing tyre pressure
monitor display button
E492 ”, page 302
6 - Parking aid button - E266-
installing parking aid
7 - Park assist steering button - E581-
❑ ⇒ “2.33 Removing and installing park assist steering button E581 ”, page 302
8 - Heated rear right seat switch with regulator - E129-
❑ ⇒ “2.35 Removing and installing heated rear seat switch with regulator E128 / E129 ”, page 304
9 - Heated rear left seat switch with regulator - E128-
❑ ⇒ “2.35 Removing and installing heated rear seat switch with regulator E128 / E129 ”, page 304
10 - Entry and start authorisation button - E408-
❑ ⇒ “2.27 Removing and installing entry and start authorisation button E408 ”, page 301
11 - TCS and ESP button - E256-
❑ ⇒ “2.26 Removing and installing TCS and ESP button E256 ”, page 301
12 - Auto-hold button - E540-
❑ ⇒ “2.25 Removing and installing auto-hold button E540 ”, page 301
2. Controls 283
2.5 Fitting locations overview - controls in

luggage compartment
⇒ “2.5.1 Fitting locations overview - controls in luggage compart‐
ment, Saloon”, page 284
⇒ “2.5.2 Fitting locations overview - controls in luggage compart‐
ment, Estate”, page 285
2.5.1 Fitting locations overview - controls in luggage compartment, Saloon

switch - F5-
❑ Luggage compartment
light switch - F5- is inte‐
grated in rear lid lock
partment light switch F5
”, page 306
2 - Button for electric hinged
towing coupling - E474-
installing electric hinged
tow coupling attach‐
ment button E474 ”,
page 305

2.5.2 Fitting locations overview - controls in luggage compartment, Estate

switch - F5-
❑ Luggage compartment
light switch - F5- is inte‐
grated in rear lid lock
partment light switch F5
”, page 306
2 - Button for electric hinged
towing coupling - E474-
installing electric hinged
tow coupling attach‐
ment button E474 ”,
page 305
2. Controls 285
2.6 Fitting locations overview - controls in roof trim
1 - Driver vanity mirror contact

switch - F147-
❑ Driver vanity mirror con‐
tact switch - F147- is in‐
tegrated in sun visor.
installing vanity mirror
contact switch F147 /
F148 ”, page 306
2 - Garage door operating unit
- E284-
❑ Garage door operating
unit - E284- is integrated
in sun visor.
installing garage door
operating unit E284 ”,
page 307
3 - Front interior light button -
E326-
installing front interior
light button E326 , read‐
ing light button E457 /
E458 ”, page 307
4 - Sliding sunroof adjustment
regulator - E139-
installing sliding sunroof
adjustment regulator
E139 ”, page 307
5 - Front passenger vanity mir‐
ror contact switch - F148-
❑ Front passenger vanity
mirror contact switch -
F148- is integrated in
sun visor.
❑ ⇒ “2.38 Removing and installing vanity mirror contact switch F147 / F148 ”, page 306
6 - Driver side reading light button - E457- and front passenger side reading light button - E458-
❑ ⇒ “2.39 Removing and installing front interior light button E326 , reading light button E457 / E458 ”, page
307
2.7 Removing and installing light switch -

E1-
The following components are integrated into the light switch -
E1- :
♦ Fog light switch - E7-
♦ Rear fog light switch - E18-
♦ Bulb for illumination of light switch - L9-

Caution

Removing:
– Turn rotary knob part of light switch to “0”.
– Press in rotary knob of light switch -arrow 1- and turn clockwise
a little -arrow 2-.
– Hold rotary knob in this position and pull on rotary knob to re‐
move entire light switch - E1- from dash panel -arrow 3-.
– Release and detach connector -arrow- and remove light

switch - E1- .
Installing:
– Reconnect connector to light switch - E1- .
– Hold light switch - E1- and press rotary knob part of lighting
switch firmly inwards -1- while simultaneously turning it clock‐
wise a little -2-.
– Hold rotary grip in this position and insert light switch - E1- into
dash panel -3- using rotary grip.
– Turn the rotary grip to position “0” in order to ensure that the
switch engages in the dash panel.
2. Controls 287
2.8 Removing and installing switch and in‐

strument illumination regulator - E20-
and headlight range control regulator -
E102-
Caution

Note
The headlight range control regulator - E102- and the switch and
instrument illumination regulator - E20- form a single component
and are not to be dismantled further.
Removing:
– Open cover -2- and remove.
– Push regulator -1- out of dash panel from the inside.
– Release and detach connector -arrow- and remove regulator

-1-.
Installing:
2.9 Removing and installing electronic igni‐

tion lock - D9-

♦ Pliers - VAS 6339-
Note
Additional information: ⇒ Operating instructions , ⇒ Self-study

programme No. 488 ; The Passat 2011 .
The ignition and starter switch of the Passat is now known as the
electronic ignition lock - D9- .
The ignition key does not have a key bit as the vehicle is started
via a pushing motion not with a turning motion. The various ter‐
minal voltages (term. S, term. 15) and the starting process with
the ignition key are switched on when the ignition key in the elec‐
tronic ignition lock - D9- is pushed. The following switch positions
are possible via pushing the start button:
♦ P0 - off (pre-detent)
♦ P1 - S contact on
♦ P2 - terminal 15 on
♦ P3 - terminal 15 drive (after the starting process, the ignition
key automatically springs back to this position)
All faults concerning the electronic ignition lock - D9- are output
via the convenience system central control unit - J393- .
The electronic ignition lock - D9- is a single component and can
be renewed only as a complete unit.
The electric ignition lock - D9- includes the following components
(depending on optional equipment):
♦ Immobiliser reader unit - D1-
♦ Button illumination bulb - L76-
♦ Ignition key withdrawal lock solenoid - N376- (vehicles with
automatic gearbox only)
♦ Entry and start authorisation switch - E415- (only vehicles with
entry and start authorisation system)
All functions concerning the entry and start authorisation are con‐
trolled via the convenience system central control unit - J393-
⇒ page 351 .
Note
If electronic ignition lock - D9- is renewed, no coding, basic setting

or adaption are necessary.
2. Controls 289
The following components (depending on equipment) are inte‐

grated into the electronic ignition lock:
♦ Immobiliser reader unit - D1-
♦ Ignition key withdrawal lock solenoid - N376- (vehicles with
automatic gearbox only)
Removing:
– Remove dash panel end trim on driver side ⇒ General body
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Remov‐
ing and installing dash panel end trim on driver side .
– Press cover -3- of trim -1- downwards to gain access to the
fasteners of the trim -1-.
– Press fasteners of trim -1- outwards through recesses on both

sides -2- using pliers - VAS 6339- .
– Remove trim.
– Unscrew bolt -1-.

– Remove electronic ignition lock - D9- -2- in
-direction of arrow- from dash panel end trim on driver side
-1-.

– Release catches -arrow- on both sides.

Installing:
Note
Ensure fasteners of electronic ignition lock have locked correctly

into trim on driver side when installing.
Checking electronic ignition lock

2.10 Removing and installing hazard warning

light button - E229-
The hazard warning lights button - E229- fitted below the info‐
tainment system in the centre console. The indicator lamp for
hazard warning light - E229- is integrated into the hazard warning
lights button - K6- .
Caution

Note
The operation of the hazard warning lights button - E229- and the
indicator lamp for hazard warning light - K6- can be tested by
means of the final control diagnostic function of the onboard pow‐
er supply control unit - J519- .
Removing:
2. Controls 291
– Unclip radio trim at points marked with -arrows-.
– Push locking mechanisms -1- in -direction of arrow- using a

suitable screwdriver.
– Push hazard warning lights button - E229- out of trim from the
inside towards outside and remove it.
Installing:
2.11 Removing and installing glove compart‐

ment light switch - E26-
Removing:

– Detach glove compartment light switch - E26- -1- from its

catches -arrows-.
– Release and detach connector and remove glove compart‐
ment light switch - E26- .
Installing:
2.12 Removing and installing key-operated

switch to deactivate front passenger
side airbag - E224-
The key switch for front passenger airbag deactivation - E224-
can be found in the glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
WARNING
Comply with the safety precautions when working on the airbag

⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 00 ; Safety instruc‐
tions; Safety instructions for airbag .
Removing:
– Remove dash panel end cover on front passenger side ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Dash panel; Re‐
moving and installing dash panel end cover .
– Compress the two catches -arrows-.
– Push key operated switch to deactivate front passenger side
airbag - E224- -1- towards inside into glove compartment.
2. Controls 293

– Remove key operated switch to deactivate front passenger
side airbag - E224- -1-.
Installing:
2.13 Removing and installing front driver side

window regulator button - E710-
⇒ “2.18 Removing and installing driver side button module”,
page 294 .
2.14 Removing and installing rear driver side

window regulator button, in driver door -
E712-
page 294 .
2.15 Removing and installing front passenger

side window regulator button, in driver
door - E715-
page 294 .
2.16 Removing and installing rear passenger

side window regulator button, in driver
door - E714-
page 294 .
2.17 Removing and installing childproof lock

button - E318-
page 294 .
2.18 Removing and installing driver side but‐

ton module

Caution


integrated into the driver side button module:
♦ Front driver side window regulator button - E710-
♦ Rear driver side window regulator button, in driver door - E712-
♦ Front passenger side window regulator button, in driver door
- E715-
♦ Rear passenger side window regulator button, in driver door -
E714-
♦ Childproof lock button - E318-
♦ Warning light for activated childproof lock - K236-
Removing:
– Release front grip trim -1- with the removal wedge - 3409- at
the locking lugs -arrows- and carefully swing upwards out of
the door trim in -direction of arrow-.
2. Controls 295
– Release and detach connectors -1- and -2- and remove grip
trim.
– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove button module -1-

from grip trim.
Installing:
2.19 Removing and installing mirror adjust‐

ment switch - E43-

integrated into the mirror adjustment switch - E43- :
♦ Mirror adjustment changeover switch - E48-
♦ Exterior mirror heater button - E231-
♦ Fold-in mirror switch - E263-
♦ Mirror adjustment switch illumination bulb - L78-
Caution


Removing:
– Release and detach connectors -1- and -2- and remove grip
trim.
– Release locking lug -arrow- and remove mirror adjustment

switch - E43- -1- from grip trim.
Installing:
2.20 Removing and installing driver side in‐

terior locking button for central locking
system - E308-
The following components are integrated in the driver side interior
locking button for central locking system - E308- :
♦ Driver side interior locking warning lamp - K174-
Removing:
– Remove door trim on driver side ⇒ General body repairs, in‐
terior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Door trims; Removing and installing front
door trim .
2. Controls 297
– Release the 4 locking lugs -arrows-.

– Remove driver side interior locking button for central locking
system - E308- -1- towards rear from door trim.
Installing:
2.21 Removing and installing rear lid remote

release button - E233-
The rear lid remote release button - E233- is integrated in the
driver door trim.
Removing:
– Remove door trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Door trims; Removing and installing front door trim .
– Release the 4 locking lugs -arrows-.
– Remove rear lid remote release button - E233- -2- from door
trim.
Installing:

2.22 Removing and installing window regula‐

tor switch in front passenger door -
E107-
Note
The window regulator switch in front passenger door - E107- con‐

tains an integral window regulator switch illumination bulb - L53- ,
which cannot be renewed separately.
Removing:
Caution


– Release and separate connector -1- and remove grip trim.
2. Controls 299
– Release locking lugs -arrows-.

– Remove window regulator switch in front passenger door -
E107- -1- from grip trim.
Installing:
2.23 Removing and installing rear window

regulator button -E711- / -E713-
The following components are integrated in the rear window reg‐
ulator button on driver side - E711- or rear window regulator
button on front passenger side - E713- :
♦ Bulb for button lighting - L76- (not to be replaced separately)
Caution

Note
Removal and installation of both buttons are performed in the

same manner and are described only for one button.
Removing:

– Release and separate connector -1- and remove grip trim.
– Release locking lugs -arrows-.

– Remove rear window regulator button -1- from grip trim.
Installing:
2.24 Removing and installing electrome‐

chanical parking brake button - E538-
⇒ “2.34 Removing and installing switch module in centre con‐
sole EX23 / EX30 ”, page 302 .
2.25 Removing and installing auto-hold but‐

ton - E540-
2.26 Removing and installing TCS and ESP

button - E256-
2.27 Removing and installing entry and start

authorisation button - E408-
2.28 Removing and installing shock absorber

damping adjustment button - E387-
2. Controls 301
2.29 Removing and installing Start/Stop op‐

eration button - E693-
2.30 Removing and installing rear roller blind

switch - E149-
2.31 Removing and installing tyre pressure

monitor display button - E492-
2.32 Removing and installing parking aid but‐

ton - E266-

steering button - E581-
2.34 Removing and installing switch module

in centre console -EX23- / -EX30-
Caution

The switch module 1 in centre console - EX23- consists of:

♦ Electromechanical parking brake button - E538-

♦ Auto-hold button - E540-

♦ TCS and ESP button - E256-
♦ Entry and start authorisation button - E408-
Switch module 2 in centre console - EX30- :
♦ Shock absorber damping adjustment button - E387-
♦ Start/stop operation switch - E693-
♦ Rear roller blind switch - E149-
♦ Tyre pressure monitor display button - E492-
♦ Parking aid button - E266-
♦ Park assist steering button - E581-
♦
Removing:
– Unclip gear lever boot and remove upwards from centre con‐
sole ⇒ Rep. gr. 34 ; Selector mechanism; Removing and
installing gear knob or ⇒ Rep. gr. 37 ; Selector mechanism;
Removing and installing selector lever handle .
– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows-.

– Lift front passenger side button module -1- or driver side button
module -2- upwards out of centre console.
2. Controls 303
– Release and detach connector -1- and remove button module

-2-.
Installing:
2.35 Removing and installing heated rear

seat switch with regulator -E128- / -
E129-
The procedure for removal and installation of the heated rear left
seat switch with regulator - E128- and the heated rear right seat
switch with regulator - E129- is the same and is therefore descri‐
bed for one switch only.
Caution

Removing:

– Unscrew bolts -arrows-.
– First, pull the trim towards the rear in -direction of arrow 1- and
then remove it upwards in -direction of arrow 2-.

– Remove heated rear left seat switch with regulator - E128-
-2- from trim.
Installing:
2.36 Removing and installing electric hinged

tow coupling attachment button - E474-
The button for electric hinged towing coupling - E474- is in the
side panel trim on the right in the luggage compartment.
Caution

Removing:
– Remove light in side panel trim on right in luggage compart‐
ment ⇒ page 267 .
2. Controls 305
– Reach through mounting hole for luggage compartment light

with your fingers.
– Push catch on electric hinged tow coupling attachment button
- E474- in -direction of arrow-.
– Swing button -1- out of trim starting on left side.

– Remove electric hinged tow coupling attachment button -
E474- -1-.
Installing:

partment light switch - F5-
The following components are integrated into the rear lid lock unit
- F256- :
♦ Luggage compartment light switch - F5-
♦ Rear lid electric opener motor - V254-
Note
♦ The above mentioned components cannot be renewed indi‐

vidually.
♦ The rear lid lock unit - F256- can be checked using final control
diagnosis for convenience system central control unit - J393- .
The rear lid locking unit - F256- is integrated into the rear lid lock
and cannot be renewed individually.
If the rear lid locking unit - F256- is found to be defective, the entire
rear lid lock must always be renewed.
– Renew rear lid lock ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr.
55 ; Rear lid; Removing and installing rear lid lock .
2.38 Removing and installing vanity mirror

contact switch -F147- / -F148-
The driver vanity mirror contact switch - F147- and front passen‐
ger vanity mirror contact switch - F148- are integrated in the sun
visors and cannot be renewed individually.
If the vanity mirror contact switch is found to be defective, the
complete sun visor must always be renewed.
– Remove sun visor ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
68 ; Equipment; Removing and installing sun visor .


light button - E326- , reading light button
-E457- / -E458-
Note
♦ The front interior light button - E326- , driver side reading light
button - E457- and front passenger side reading light button -
E458- cannot be replaced individually.
♦ The complete component must be renewed in the event of re‐
pair.
2.40 Removing and installing sliding sunroof

adjustment regulator - E139-
Removing:
– Release locking lugs -arrows- and remove sliding sunroof ad‐
justment regulator - E139- from trim.
Installing:
following:
– When installing, align the sliding sunroof adjustment regulator

- E139- by its lug -2- to the groove in the trim.
2.41 Removing and installing garage door

operating unit - E284-
The garage door opener is integrated in the sun visor on the driver
side. The sun visor includes:
♦ the garage door operation control unit - J530- ,
♦ the garage door opener button 1 - E392- ,
♦ the garage door opener button 2 - E393- ,
♦ the garage door opener button 3 - E394- and
2. Controls 307
♦ the garage door opener warning lamp - K179- in one compo‐

nent.
Note
♦ The garage door opener cannot be renewed individually. The

complete sun visor must be renewed when defective.
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions
Removing:
– Remove sun visor on driver side ⇒ General body repairs, in‐
terior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Equipment; Removing and installing sun
visor .
2.42 Removing and installing interior moni‐

toring deactivation switch - E267-
The interior monitor deactivation switch - E267- and the deacti‐

vation button for vehicle inclination sender - E360- are a single
component and are located in the B-pillar trim on the driver side.
The following components have been integrated:
♦ Interior monitoring off warning lamp - K162-
♦ Deactivation of interior monitoring system switch illumination
bulb - L118-
Caution


Note
♦ The anti-theft alarm system must be deactivated before re‐

moving the interior monitor deactivation switch - E267- and the
deactivation button for vehicle inclination sender - E360- .
♦ The interior monitoring off warning lamp - K162- and the ve‐
hicle inclination sender warning lamp - K188- can be checked
by the final control diagnosis for the convenience system cen‐
tral control unit - J393- .
Removing:
– Carefully prise out the interior monitoring deactivation switch
- E267- and the deactivation button for vehicle inclination
sender - E360- using the wedge - VAS 3409- or a suitable
screwdriver.

Installing:
2.43 Removing and installing bonnet contact

switch - F266-
Removing:
– Remove bonnet lock ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 55 ; Bonnet; Removing and installing bonnet lock and
Bowden cable .
2. Controls 309

– Unclip wire retainer -1-.
– Cut off cable tie -2-.

– Release locking lug -1- and move bonnet contact switch -
F266- in elongated holes until it can be removed.
Installing:
following:
– Secure the wiring harness of the bonnet contact switch - F266-
at the same place again with a cable tie.

3 Immobiliser
⇒ “3.1 General description”, page 311
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing immobilizer reading unit D1 ”,
page 312
⇒ “3.4 Ignition key”, page 312
⇒ “3.3 Immobiliser control unit J362 ”, page 312
⇒ “3.5 Online system test”, page 313
3.1 General description
Note
Additional information: ⇒ Self-study programme No. 488 ; The

Passat 2011
The Passat features a fourth-generation immobiliser with online
connection. The main component of the fourth generation immo‐
biliser is a central database, in which all of the theft-relevant data
from the participating control units is stored. Adapting the control
units associated with the immobiliser is not possible without an
online link to this database.
Online system test ⇒ page 313
New features of the forth-generation immobiliser:
♦ There is no PIN request of the immobiliser components by fax
nor provisional activation of the components.
♦ All components associated with the immobiliser must be adap‐
ted online.
♦ All ignition keys (including re-ordered ones) are pre-coded to
a specific vehicle in the factory and can only be adapted to this
vehicle.
♦ The respective vehicle identification number must be specified
when re-ordering ignition keys.
♦ It is no longer possible to adapt components of other brands
for use in Volkswagen vehicles.
Immobiliser components:
♦ Immobiliser control unit - J362- ⇒ page 312
♦ Electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- ⇒ Running
gear, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 48 ; Steering column; Removing
and installing ESL control unit
♦ Electronic ignition lock - D9- ⇒ page 288
♦ Engine control unit - J623- ⇒ Rep. gr. 24 ; Engine control unit;
Removing and installing engine control unit or ⇒ Rep. gr. 23 ;
Engine control unit; Removing and installing engine control
unit
♦ Ignition key ⇒ page 312
Changing all components for immobiliser
Immobilizer control unit - J362- functions:
♦ Storing all theft-relevant data in the central database via the
online link.
3. Immobiliser 311
♦ Communication between all components associated with the

immobiliser.
♦ Encryption of data between associated control units.
The immobiliser is equipped with self-diagnosis, which makes
fault finding easier.
3.2 Removing and installing immobilizer

reading unit - D1-
The immobiliser reading unit - D1- is integrated in the electronic
ignition switch and cannot be replaced separately.
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing electronic ignition lock D9 ”, page
288
3.3 Immobiliser control unit - J362-

The immobiliser control unit - J362- is integrated in the conven‐
ience system central control unit - J393- .
If the immobiliser control unit is defective, the convenience sys‐
tem central control unit - J393- must be renewed.
– Removing and installing convenience system central control
unit - J393- ⇒ page 351 .
Adapting immobiliser control unit
After renewing the convenience system central control unit -
J393- , the immobiliser must be adapted.
3.4 Ignition key

Loss of ignition key: ⇒ page 313
Adapting ignition key: ⇒ page 313
Checking ignition key: ⇒ page 313
New identity on renewing all components: ⇒ page 313
The ignition key does not have a key bit as the vehicle is started
via a pushing motion not with a turning motion. The reading coil
for identifying the key and an emergency key are integrated into
the ignition key. The emergency key serves to mechanically un‐
lock the driver door when opening via radio remote control is not
possible. The emergency key is inserted into the ignition key and
can be disengaged in two stages by pressing the buttons on the
side.
Detent 1 = emergency key is fully inserted
Detent 2 = key fob can be used - emergency key remains locked
The various terminal voltages (term. S, term. 15) and the starting
process are switched on when the ignition key in the electronic
ignition lock - D9- is pushed. The following switch positions are
possible via pushing the start button:
♦ P0 - off (pre-detent)
♦ P1 - S contact on

♦ P3 - terminal 15 drive (after the starting process, the ignition

key automatically springs back to this position)
Loss of the ignition key
All ignition keys (including re-ordered ones) are pre-coded to a
specific vehicle in the factory and can only be adapted to this ve‐
hicle. The relevant vehicle identification number must be specified
when re-ordering ignition keys. The new keys must subsequently
be adapted to the immobiliser control unit - J362- .
Note
♦ If the entire lock set (all keys and lock cylinders) are renewed,
the electronic steering column lock control unit - J764- must
also be renewed together with the immobilizer control unit -
J362- .
♦ Before removing lock set or control units, “New identity on re‐
newing all components” function must be called up
⇒ page 313 .
Adapting ignition key to immobiliser control unit - J362-

⇒ page 312 .
Checking ignition key ⇒ page 313 .
Adapting ignition key
Checking ignition key:
New identity on renewing all components
This program performs all the processes required for a recon‐
struction/reinitialisation of all immobiliser components.
3.5 Online system test

The following processes are performed with this test program:
♦ System test for online connection
♦ Check of user authorization
♦ Test for correct line connection to Volkswagen database
Prerequisite for this is the online connection (network connection)
of the tester.
3. Immobiliser 313
4 Anti-theft alarm
⇒ “4.1 Assembly overview - anti-theft alarm system”, page 314
⇒ “4.2 Activating and deactivating anti-theft alarm”, page 315
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing alarm horn H12 ”, page 316
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing interior monitor send and receive
module 1 G303 ”, page 318
⇒ “4.5 Removing and installing interior monitoring sensor G273 ”,
page 321
⇒ “4.6 Removing and installing vehicle inclination sender G384 ”,
page 321
4.1 Assembly overview - anti-theft alarm

system
Note
The components of the anti-theft alarm (ATA) depend on vehicle

equipment.
1 - Bonnet contact switch -

F266-
❑ Location: in bonnet lock
⇒ page 309
2 - Alarm horn - H12-
❑ Location: in front right
wheel housing
⇒ page 316
3 - Convenience system cen‐
tral control unit - J393-
❑ Location: behind glove
compartment
⇒ page 351
4 - Front passenger door con‐
trol unit - J387-
❑ Location: in front pas‐
senger door
⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ;
Window regulator; Re‐
moving and installing
front window regulator
motor
5 - Front passenger door con‐
tact switch - F3-
❑ Location: in front pas‐
senger door lock unit -
VX22-
⇒ General body repairs,

exterior; Rep. gr. 57 ;

Components; Removing and installing door lock
6 - Interior monitor send and receive module 1 - G303-
❑ Location: in roof console of interior light
❑ Contains vehicle inclination sender - G384- / and interior monitoring sensor - G273-
7 - Rear right door contact switch - F11-
❑ Location: in rear right door lock unit - VX24-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 58 ; Components; Removing and
installing door lock
8 - Rear lid lock unit - F256-
❑ Location: in rear lid lock
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 55 ; Rear lid; Removing and installing
rear lid lock
9 - Rear left door contact switch - F10-
❑ Location: in rear left door lock unit - VX23-
10 - Interior monitor deactivation switch - E267- and deactivation button for vehicle inclination sender - E360-
❑ Location: in B-pillar trim on driver side
11 - Door contact switch, driver side - F2-
❑ Location: in driver door lock unit - VX21-
12 - Central locking SAFELOCK function warning lamp - K133-
❑ Location: in front door trim panel
13 - Driver door control unit - J386-
❑ Location: in driver door
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 64 ; Window regulator; Removing
and installing front window regulator motor
14 - Central locking and anti-theft alarm system aerial - R47-
❑ Location: integrated in wiring harness
4.2 Activating and deactivating anti-theft

alarm
Activating anti-theft alarm:
The anti-theft alarm system is switched on automatically when the
vehicle is locked. The anti-theft alarm is then immediately primed.
Note
♦ To stop the anti-theft alarm system triggering an alarm unnec‐

essarily, close all windows and doors completely before lock‐
ing vehicle.
♦ The anti-theft alarm cannot be activated if:
♦ Ignition terminal 15 is switched.
4. Anti-theft alarm 315

♦ The immobiliser detects an authorised key.

♦ The driver door is open.
♦ The door control unit is not OK
Deactivating anti-theft alarm:
Anti-theft alarm system is deactivated if
♦ vehicle is unlocked using radio remote control unlocking but‐
ton,
♦ the vehicle is opened by way of the keyless access feature,
♦ the ignition terminal 15 is switched or
♦ The immobiliser detects an authorised key.
Unlock the vehicle mechanically (emergency open)
– Unlock vehicle on driver door using emergency key.
The anti-theft alarm system remains active, although no alarm is
triggered.
– Switch ignition on within 15 seconds.
Note
If you do not switch on the ignition, the alarm will trigger after 15
seconds.
When the ignition is switched on, the electronic immobiliser de‐

tects a valid ignition key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm.
4.3 Removing and installing alarm horn -

H12-
♦ Hand drill - VAS 5134-
♦ Pop rivet pliers - VAS 5072-

♦ Drill bit, 2.5 mm in diameter

♦ Drill bit, 6 mm in diameter
The alarm horn - H12- is located in the front right wheel housing.
Note
♦ The anti-theft alarm must be deactivated before removing the

alarm horn ⇒ Operating instructions .
♦ The alarm horn - H12- can be checked using final control di‐
agnosis for convenience system central control unit - J393-
⇒ page 351 .
Removing:
– Remove front right wheel housing liner ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner; Removing
and installing wheel housing liner .
– Use drill - VAS 5134- and a 6 mm drill bit to drill out the heads
of both pop rivets -arrows-.
– Release and detach the connector through the opening in the

housing with the help of a small screwdriver and remove alarm
horn - H12- from wheel housing.
– Unscrew hexagon nut on backside of housing.
– Remove alarm horn - H12- from housing.
Installing:

– Use drill - VAS 5134- and a 2.5 mm drill bit to drill out and
remove the two pop rivets -arrows-.
Note
Remove any swarf caused by drilling.
– Perform necessary corrosion protection measures ⇒ Body

Repairs; Rep. gr. General notes ; Corrosion protection meas‐
ures; Corrosion protection .
– Insert alarm horn - H12- into housing and secure with hexagon
bolt.
– Attach connector to alarm horn - H12- so that it engages in the
latch.
Note
For reasons of clarity, the alarm horn - H12- is not shown in the
following illustration, therefore the connector is shown discon‐
nected.
– Guide clip -2- of alarm horn - H12- into aperture in body -1-.
– Align housing with the holes in the body and secure to body
with new blind rivets.
– Install front right wheel housing liner ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 ; Wheel housing liner; Removing and
installing wheel housing liner .
4.4 Removing and installing interior monitor

send and receive module 1 - G303-

Reading alarm sources of alarm horn: ⇒ page 321

Adapting the anti-theft alarm system: ⇒ page 321
Note
Additional information: Activating and deactivating anti-theft

alarm system ⇒ Operating instructions , ⇒ Self-study programme
No. 488 ; The Passat 2011 .
The functions of the ATA are integrated into the convenience
system central control unit - J393- .
The anti-theft alarm has a self-diagnosis function, which makes
fault finding easier.
Note
♦ If the anti-theft alarm has been triggered, the alarm source

stored in the convenience system central control unit - J393-
can be read ⇒ page 351 .
♦ Once the alarm horn - H12- has been triggered the source of
the alarm, which has been stored in the convenience system
central control unit - J393- can be read ⇒ page 351 .
Caution

Note
♦ The interior monitor send and receive module 1 - G303- , the

vehicle inclination sender - G384- and the interior monitoring
sensor - G273- (3 sensors) form one part.
♦ The following illustrations show removal and installation of the
anti-theft alarm sensor - G578- on a vehicle with sliding/tilting
sunroof. Removal and installation of anti-theft alarm sensor -
G578- on vehicles without sliding/tilting sunroof are carried out
in the same way.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers, and withdraw
ignition key.

– Carefully lever off trim -1- at fasteners -arrows-.
– Remove bolts -1-, release locking lugs -arrows 3- and remove

interior light -2- in direction of -arrow A- from moulded head‐
liner, taking connected wiring length into consideration.
– Release and detach connectors -1-, -2- and -3-.

– Remove front interior light.
– Remove the four screws -arrows A-, release locking lugs

-arrows B- and remove console from moulded headliner in di‐
rection of -arrow C-.

– Pull connector -2- off interior monitor send and receive module
1 - G303- -1-.
– Release interior monitor send and receive module 1 - G303-
-1- at fasteners -arrows-.
– Release the locking lugs of the interior monitoring sensors

-arrows-.
– Remove the interior monitoring sensors and the interior mon‐
itor send and receive module 1 - G303- from moulded head‐
liner.
Reading alarm sources of alarm horn
This function can be used to read the alarm sources of the alarm
horn.
Adapting the anti-theft alarm system
The following functions of the anti-theft alarm system can be
adapted:
♦ Reading alarm sources of anti-theft alarm
♦ Adapting alarm delay on opening driver door
♦ Adapting armed feedback for ATA
4.5 Removing and installing interior moni‐

toring sensor - G273-
The interior monitor send and receive module 1 - G303- , the ve‐
hicle inclination sender - G384- and the interior monitoring sensor
- G273- (3 sensors) form one part.
The interior monitoring sensor - G273- consists of three individual
sensors which are connected via wiring to the interior monitor
send and receive module 1 - G303- .
The interior monitoring sensors cannot be renewed individually.
Removing and installing interior monitor send and receive module
1 - G303- ⇒ page 318 .
4.6 Removing and installing vehicle inclina‐

tion sender - G384-
The interior monitor send and receive module 1 - G303- , the ve‐
hicle inclination sender - G384- and the interior monitoring sensor
- G273- (3 sensors) form one part.
The vehicle inclination sender - G384- cannot be renewed sepa‐
rately. Removing and installing interior monitor send and receive
module 1 - G303- ⇒ page 318 .

5 Lane change assist

⇒ “5.1 Removing and installing lane change assist warning lamp
in exterior mirror K233 / K234 ”, page 322
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing lane change assist control unit
J769 / J770 ”, page 323
⇒ “5.3 Calibrating lane change assist”, page 324
⇒ “5.4 Calibrating lane change assist control unit J769 / J770 ”,
page 329
5.1 Removing and installing lane change

assist warning lamp in exterior mirror -
K233- / -K234-
Note
♦ The brightness of the warning lamps during operation de‐

pends on the ambient brightness and is controlled by the rain
and light sensor.
♦ The basic brightness of the warning lights can be preset via
the »Settings« menu in the dash panel insert.
♦ Removal and installation of the lane change assist warning
lamps in exterior mirror driver side - K233- and lane change
assist warning lamps in exterior mirror front passenger side -
K234- is carried out in the same manner and is described in
the following illustrations for just one side.
Removing:
– Remove mirror glass ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 66 ; Exterior mirror; Removing and installing mirror glass .
Remove mirror trim ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr.
66 ; Exterior mirror; Removing and installing mirror trim .


– Compress the catches -arrows- on top and bottom.
– Remove lane change assist warning lamp in exterior mirror
-2- towards outside from mirror housing.
Installing:
Note
In the event of one of more defective LEDs, the lane change assist
warning lamp in exterior mirror must be replaced completely.
WARNING
Risk of shattering
The mirror glass could break.
Always wear protective gloves during this work.
Note
When pressing down on the mirror glass, ensure that only the
centre is subjected to pressure.
– Fit mirror glass on adjuster unit and press mirror glass on.
– Tighten securing screws of trim frame to 1 Nm.
5.2 Removing and installing lane change

assist control unit -J769- / -J770-
Note

the function and operation of the lane change assistant (Side
Assist) is understood.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's manual

The lane change assist system (Side Assist) is equipped with self-
diagnosis, which is designed to simplify fault finding.
Use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester for fault finding.
To check the lane change assist system (Side Assist) as a whole,
perform a final control diagnosis ⇒ page 324 .
The lane change assist control unit - J769- left (master) and lane
change assist control unit 2 - J770- right (slave) is joined to the
relevant radar sensor to form one unit for each side respectively.
The lane change assist control units can be found at the rear of
vehicle on the left and right behind the bumper cover.
5. Lane change assist 323

Removing:
Note
♦ The following information is for removal and installation of lane

change assist control unit 2 - J770- right; removal and instal‐
lation of lane change assist control unit - J769- left is carried
out in the same manner.
♦ If both lane change assist control units or just lane change
assist control unit - J769- left (master) require changing, the
lane change assist system must first be coded on completion
of the assembly work and then calibrated ⇒ page 324 .
♦ If just lane change assist control unit 2 - J770- right (slave)
requires changing, the lane change assist system only has to
be calibrated on completion of assembly work ⇒ page 324 .
Final control diagnosis for lane change assist control unit:

⇒ page 324
Coding lane change assist control unit: ⇒ page 324
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers, and pull out
ignition key.
bumper .
– Unscrew the 3 securing bolts -2-.
– Remove lane change assist control unit -3- from bracket -1-.
Installing:
following:
– Tighten the 3 securing screws for the lane change assist con‐
trol -2- to 2.5 Nm.
– On completion of assembly work, calibrate the lane change
assist system (Side Assist) ⇒ page 324 .
Final control diagnosis for lane change assist control unit
Coding lane change assist control unit
5.3 Calibrating lane change assist

The lane change assist control unit - J769- left (master) and lane
change assist control unit 2 - J770- right (slave) is joined to the
relevant radar sensor to form one unit for each side respectively.
They can be found behind the rear bumper cover and must be
calibrated following:
♦ Removal and installation of bumper cover
♦ Removal and installation of one or both lane change assist
control units
♦ Any change in the installation position of a lane change assist
control unit
Extensive preliminary work is required before actual calibration
can be carried out using vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ page 326 .

Measurement location: ⇒ page 325

Measurement location
1 - Volkswagen logo
❑ Laser pointer aligned to
centre of Volkswagen
logo
2 - Wheel centre mounting -
VAS 6350/1-
❑ With wheel bolt adapter
(AF 19) and measuring
paddle
3 - Stop bracket
❑ to support spacing laser
-VAS 6350/2- for dis‐
tance measurement
❑ Distance from wheel
centre mountings -VAS
6350/1- on rear wheels:
dimension
-a- = 1700 ± 2 mm.
4 - Spirit level
❑ on calibration unit - VAS
6350-
❑ to check horizontal po‐
sition of calibration unit -
VAS 6350-
5 - Calibration unit - VAS 6350-
6 - Plastic foot
❑ Qty. 3
❑ Adjustable to change
horizontal position of
calibration unit - VAS
6350-
7 - Spacing laser - VAS
6350/2-
❑ for distance measure‐
ment
❑ Handling ⇒ Operating instructions
8 - Linear laser - VAS 6350/3-
❑ with “laser goggles”
❑ on calibration unit - VAS 6350-
❑ Switching on and off ⇒ Operating instructions
9 - Measuring scale
❑ to position calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS 6350/4-
❑ Dimension to be set, measuring point on steel rule = 641 mm
10 - Calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS 6350/4-
❑ is changed over from the left to the right-hand side of the measuring field during calibration
❑ If assembled correctly, the mains power lead should be fitted to the bottom left of the calibration unit (as
seen facing direction of normal travel)
❑ Height of upper edge of calibration unit to hall floor: approx. 850 mm

Preparatory measures for calibration

Prerequisites:
• Position vehicle on a firm and level surface.
• Press the parking brake button. Vehicle must not be moved
during measurement.
• Align front wheels to straight-ahead position. The steering
wheel must be in zero-position.
• Set ride height to medium on vehicles with adaptive suspen‐
sion (see display in dash panel insert).
• If necessary, remove sticker with metal foil from bumper cover.
• Nobody may be inside vehicle during measurement.
• Opening and closing the vehicle doors during calibration must
be avoided.
♦ Calibration unit - VAS 6350-
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester .

– Switch on ignition.

– Attach 3 wheel bolt adapters (spanner size 19) to each wheel

centre mounting - VAS 6350/1- for the wheel securing bolts.
– Insert the measuring paddles in the two wheel centre mount‐
ings -VAS 6350/1- and secure them with the clamping nuts.
– Fit the wheel centre mountings - VAS 6350/1- onto the wheel
bolts on both rear wheels.
• The turning centre of the wheel centre mounting must be in
the turning centre of the wheel.
Note
Place wheel centre mountings - VAS 6350/1- on wheels so that

“anti-theft wheel bolts” are not connected to the wheel centre
mountings.
– Set measuring paddles with the help of the clamping nuts in

such a way that they can move freely just above the floor.
• The measuring paddles must not be restricted in movement.
• The measuring paddles must be vertical.
– Position the calibration unit - VAS 6350- at a distance of -a- to

the rear wheels.
• Dimension -a- = 1700 ± 2 mm.
– Switch on spacing laser -VAS 6350/2- with the ON button.

Display on -VAS 6350/2- :
• “- - - m”
Note
The laser is switched on at the same time.

– Hold spacing laser -VAS 6350/2- -2- for distance measure‐

ment flush with stop bracket as shown in the illustration.
• The spacing laser -VAS 6350/2- must be firmly in contact with
the stop bracket when doing this.
– Ensure that the “laser beam” for distance measurement is at
the bottom enlarged part on the measuring paddle -1-.
If this is not the case, the height of the measuring paddles has to
be correct with the aid of the clamp nuts on the wheel centre
mounting - VAS 6350/1- .
– Briefly press ON button to measure distance.

Display on -VAS 6350/2- :
• “1700 mm” (specification: 1700 ± 2 mm).
– Repeat the measuring process from the left stop bracket to the
measuring paddle on the rear left wheel.
• Measured distance value must be identical on both sides.
If both measured values are not identical, adjust calibration unit -
VAS 6350- accordingly.
– Attach the calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS 6350/4-
on the rear left on the mounting of the calibration unit - VAS
6350- .
• If assembled correctly, the mains power lead should be fitted
to the bottom left of the calibration unit (as seen facing direc‐
tion of normal travel).
• Dimension -a- = 850 mm (measured from upper edge of cali‐
bration unit to workshop floor).
– The dimension is set with the measuring point -arrow- at the
base of the calibration unit on the scale of the steel rule -1-.
• Setting dimension left = 641 mm (read off on measuring scale
-1-).
– Connect the calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS
6350/4- to mains voltage.
– Bring the calibration unit - VAS 6350- to the horizontal position

with the aid of the vial (sight glass) -arrow- by turning the plas‐
tic feet.

– Put on “laser protection glasses”.

– Switch on linear laser - VAS 6350/3- on calibration unit - VAS
6350- .
– Align the whole calibration unit - VAS 6350- so that the laser
beam is focused on the rear of the vehicle in the centre above
the VW badge.
– Check the spacing on the left and right again between the stop
brackets of the calibration unit - VAS 6350- and the measuring
paddles -1- on the wheel mountings.
• Specification: 1700 ± 2 mm
Calibrating lane change assist control unit ⇒ page 329 .
5.4 Calibrating lane change assist control

unit -J769- / -J770-
Note
Before the actual calibration process of the lane change assist

control units, the calibration unit - VAS 6350- has to be setup as
described in chapter.
Procedure: ⇒ page 330


♦ Calibration unit - VAS 6350-
During the calibration process the following should not occur:

• Vehicle doors should not be opened or closed.
• There should be no-one in the vehicle.
• No-one should pass through the space between the vehicle
and the calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS 6350/4- .
Procedure:
– Switch on the calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS
6350/4- using the mains switch -3-.
• The green LED -1- must light up.
Note
If the red LED lights up -2-: Check the calibration unit for lane
change assist -VAS 6350/4- .
– ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
During the program sequence you will be requested to change

the calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS 6350/4- from the
left to the right-hand side of the calibration unit - VAS 6350- .
– Switch off the calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS
6350/4- and change to the other side.
• If assembled correctly, the mains power lead should be fitted
to the bottom left of the calibration unit (as seen facing direc‐
tion of normal travel).
• Dimension -a- = 850 mm (measured from upper edge of cali‐
bration unit to floor).
• Setting dimension right = 641 mm (read off from measuring
scale -1-).

– Switch on the calibration unit for lane change assist -VAS

6350/4- using the mains switch -3-.
• The green LED -1- must light up.
– Proceed by following the instructions on the display of vehicle
diagnostic tester .
Upon completion of lane change assist system calibration switch
off ignition and disconnect diagnosis connector.

6 Cigarette lighter, sockets

⇒ “6.1 Removing and installing cigarette lighter U1 ”, page 332
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing DC/AC converter with socket,
12 V-230 V U13 ”, page 332
6.1 Removing and installing cigarette lighter

- U1-
The cigarette lighter - U1- is located in the front section of the
centre console next to the ashtray.
Removing and installing ⇒ Electrical System, General Informa‐
tion; Rep. gr. 96 ; Cigarette lighter, socket; Assembly overview -
cigarette lighter, 12 V socket .
6.2 Removing and installing DC/AC con‐

verter with socket, 12 V-230 V - U13-
WARNING
♦ Capacitors are also located in the housing of the DC/AC

converter with socket, 12 V - 230 V - U13- and these are
charged with a residual voltage.
♦ There is a danger of an electric shock.
♦ The housing of the DC/AC converter with socket, 12 V -
230 V - U13- must never be opened.

Caution

Note
♦ The connector, wiring and 230 V socket must never be re‐

paired.
♦ The complete unit must be replaced if the connector, wiring
and 230 V socket or the AC/DC converter are defective.

Removing:
– Unscrew bolts -arrows-.
– First, pull the trim towards the rear in -direction of arrow 1- and
then remove it upwards in -direction of arrow 2-.

– Unclip heated rear seat switch with regulator from trim in ve‐
hicles with heated rear seats.
6. Cigarette lighter, sockets 333

– Release socket at locking lugs -arrows- and remove socket

from trim.
– Remove the 4 securing bolts -arrows-.

– Remove AC/DC converter with socket, 12 V - 230 V - U13- .
Installing:

97 – Wiring
1 Relay carriers, fuse holders, elec‐
tronics boxes
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing electronics box (E-box)”,
page 335
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing main fuse holder in electronics
box”, page 341
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing dash panel fuse holder”,
page 341
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind dash
panel on driver side”, page 342
1.1 Removing and installing electronics box

(E-box)
⇒ “1.1.1 Removing and installing electronics box, in engine com‐
partment”, page 335
⇒ “1.1.2 Removing and installing electronics box, in luggage com‐
partment”, page 339
1.1.1 Removing and installing electronics box,

in engine compartment
Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .
Removing:
– Push locking bar -1- in -direction of arrow-.
– Remove electronics box cover -2- upwards.
1. Relay carriers, fuse holders, electronics boxes 335

– Unscrew hexagon nuts -1-.

– Open covers -2- of cable guides on electronics box -arrows-.
– Remove cables from connection threads.
– Unclip cables from cable guides.
– Unscrew central bolt -arrow- of electronics box -1-.
Note
When the central bolt -arrow- is removed, the electronics box

-1- is pushed upwards off the electronics box bracket.
– Pull electronics box -1- upwards off bracket of electronics box.
Note
For removal of the flat contact housing -1-, the air filter housing
(only vehicles with diesel engine), the battery and the battery tray
must be removed.
– Remove air filter housing if necessary ⇒ Rep. gr. 23 ; Air filter;

Removing and installing air filter housing or ⇒ Rep. gr. 24 ;
Air filter; Removing and installing air filter housing .
– Remove battery ⇒ page 9 .
336 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

– Undo bolts -arrows- of battery tray -1-.

– Remove battery tray -1- from vehicle.
– Push apart tabs on bracket of electronics box -arrows B- and

slide out flat contact housing -1- sideways -arrow A- from
bracket of electronics box.
– Push apart tabs on bracket of electronics box -arrows C-, and
slide out flat contact housing -2- forwards -arrow D- from
bracket of electronics box.
– Undo nuts -arrows- of electronics box -1-.
Note
The installation of an additional relay carrier depends entirely on

the vehicle equipment.
– Pull bracket of electronics box -1- upwards off studs (as far as
cables of additional relay carrier allow).

– Unclip additional relay carrier -1- sideways out of bracket of

electronics box -2-.
– Remove electronics box -2-retainer from vehicle.
Installing:
– Tighten central bolt -arrow- to 9 Nm.
– Tighten nuts -1-: M5 to 4 Nm and M6 to 6 Nm.

– Fit cover -2- onto electronics box and push locking bar -1- in
-direction of arrow- until cover -2- engages.
Note
Check that the cover -2- of the electronics box has engaged cor‐
rectly.
1.1.2 Removing and installing electronics box,

in luggage compartment
A main fuse box is installed above the battery in vehicles with a

battery in the luggage compartment and contains the pyrotechnic
battery isolator, among other things.
The main fuse box is located in the luggage compartment behind
the left wheel housing.
WARNING
♦ Observe safety precautions when working on battery iso‐

lator ⇒ page 17 .
Note

finding and Fitting locations
Removing:
– Remove pyrotechnic battery isolator ⇒ page 17 .

– Undo nuts -3-, -4- and -5- and remove cables from connection
threads.
– Pull connector -1- out of its retaining element in the main fuse
box.
– Swing locking bar -1- outwards in direction of arrow and detach

connector -2-.
– Undo the two screws -arrows- and remove the main fuse box
-1- from the vehicle.
Installing:
– Tighten all threaded connections to specified torque.
– Tighten nuts -3-, -4- and -5- to 9 Nm.

– Tighten securing bolts -arrows- to 9 Nm.
1.2 Removing and installing main fuse hold‐

er in electronics box
Removing and installing fuse box in electronics box is explained
in the course of the description “Removing and installing elec‐
tronics box on the left in engine compartment” ⇒ page 335 .
1.3 Removing and installing dash panel

fuse holder
♦ Removal wedge - VAS 3409-
Note
♦ The Passat is fitted with 2 fuse holders, one each on the left
and right of the dash panel.
♦ The following illustrations show the procedure for “Removing
left fuse holder”. The procedure for removing the right fuse
holder is analogous.

Caution

served ⇒ page 4 .
Removing:
– Insert removal wedge - VAS 3409- or a screwdriver into open‐
ing -2- and lever the -1- cover off in -direction of arrow-.
– Undo securing bolts -arrows- and remove fuse holder -1- as

far as wiring allows.
Installing:
– Tighten securing bolts -arrows- to 4 Nm.
1.4 Removing and installing relay and fuse

holder behind dash panel on driver side
⇒ “1.4.1 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind
dash panel on driver side, in footwell”, page 343
⇒ “1.4.2 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind
dash panel on driver side, on onboard supply control unit”,
page 344

1.4.1 Removing and installing relay and fuse

holder behind dash panel on driver side,
in footwell
The relay carrier on the left in the dash panel is clipped into a
holder in the footwell on the driver side.
Caution

⇒ page 4 .
Removing:
– Open and remove storage compartment in the trim in footwell
on driver side.
– Press catch -arrow-.
– Swing relay holder out of bracket starting on right side.
– Turn relay carrier over, taking into account the lengths of at‐
tached wires.
– Push the two release buttons on backside of relay connector

-arrows- towards inside.
– Pull relay connector -1- together with the relay out of relay
holder -2-.
– Do the same with all the other relays (number of relays de‐
pends on equipment) and then remove the relay carrier -2-.
Installing:
– First, attach the relay connectors to the relays in the relay car‐
rier.
– Insert the relay carrier -2- into the guide -1- and then push it
in to latch it into place on the other side.
Note
During installation, make sure that the relay connectors are se‐
curely engaged in the relay carrier and that the relay carrier is
latched securely in place in its holder.

1.4.2 Removing and installing relay and fuse

holder behind dash panel on driver side,
on onboard supply control unit
Note
The relay carrier on the onboard supply control unit is clipped un‐
der the onboard supply control unit and can be replaced as an
individual unit. The onboard power supply control unit is located
in a holder in the driver footwell.
Removing:
– Remove driver side footwell cover ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing and
installing dash panel end trim on driver side .
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Dash panel; Removing and in‐
stalling dash panel decorative strip .
– Press the two catches -arrows- and swing onboard power
supply control unit - J519- downwards a little.
– Pull onboard power supply control unit - J519- downwards and
remove from bracket against direction of normal travel.
– Turn onboard power supply control unit - J519- over, taking
into account the lengths of attached wires.
– Release the two catches -arrows-.

– Push relay holder -1- in -direction of arrow- off onboard supply
control unit - J519- -2-.
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

– Push the two release buttons on backside of relay connector

-arrows- towards inside.
– Pull relay connector -1- together with the relay out of relay
holder -2-.
– Do the same with all the other relays (number of relays de‐
pends on equipment) and then remove the relay carrier -2-.
Installing:
following:
Note
During installation, make sure that the relay connectors are se‐
curely engaged in the relay carrier and that the relay carrier is
latched securely in place on the onboard power supply control
unit.

2 Select Control units

⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing onboard supply control unit J519
”, page 346
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing data bus diagnostic interface J533
”, page 350
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing convenience system central con‐
trol unit J393 ”, page 351
2.1 Removing and installing onboard supply

Renewing onboard power supply control unit: ⇒ page 348
Coding onboard supply control unit: ⇒ page 348
Final control diagnosis of onboard supply control unit:
⇒ page 348
Adapting onboard supply control unit: ⇒ page 349
Note
♦ At the onboard power supply control unit - J519- , the relay

carrier is attached to the onboard power supply control unit -
J519- . The two components cannot be renewed individually.
♦ The following illustrations show removal on a LHD vehicle.
Removal and installation of onboard supply control unit on an
RHD vehicle are performed using the corresponding mirror-
image procedure.
♦ If the onboard supply control unit - J519- is to be renewed, the
procedure for “replacing onboard supply control unit”
⇒ page 348 must always be carried out for reading the codes
stored in the control unit.
♦ Additional information: ⇒ Self-study programme No. 488 ; The
Passat 2011 , ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding
and Fitting locations, ⇒ Operating instructions
The onboard supply control unit - J519- has the following equip‐
ment-specific functions in the vehicle:
♦ Electrical load management
♦ Exterior light control
♦ Turn signal control
♦ Rear window wiper
♦ Heated windows
♦ Dimming of footwell light
♦ Fuel delivery unit
Removing:


– Remove driver side footwell cover ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing and
installing dash panel end trim on driver side .
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Dash panel; Removing and in‐
stalling dash panel decorative strip .
– Press the two catches -arrows- and swing onboard power
supply control unit - J519- downwards a little.
– Pull onboard power supply control unit - J519- downwards and
remove from bracket against direction of normal travel.
– Turn onboard power supply control unit - J519- over, taking
into account the lengths of attached wires.
– Release the two catches -arrows-.

– Push relay holder -1- in -direction of arrow- off onboard supply
control unit - J519- -2-.
2. Select Control units 347

– Release 3 connectors -arrows- and separate.

– Remove onboard power supply control unit -1-.
Installing:
following:
Note
When installing, ensure that onboard supply control unit is se‐

curely latched in place in its holder.
Replacing onboard power supply control unit

Coding onboard supply control unit
Final control diagnosis of onboard supply control unit
Note
Whether the components named below can be checked depends

on the fitted equipment options.
The following components and/or functions can be checked by

the final control diagnosis for the onboard control unit:
♦ Left side light bulb - M1- and right side light bulb - M3-
♦ Left tail light bulb - M4- or right tail light bulb - M2-
♦ Left headlight dipped beam bulb - M29- and right headlight
dipped beam bulb - M31-
♦ Left headlight main beam bulb - M30- and right headlight main
beam bulb - M32-
♦ Left dip beam screen motor - V294- and right dip beam screen
motor - V295-
♦ Left fog light bulb - L22- and right fog light bulb - L23-
♦ Right reversing light bulb - M17- or left reversing light bulb -
M16-
♦ Left brake light bulb - M9- or right brake light bulb - M10-
♦ High-level brake light bulb - M25-
♦ Rear left fog light bulb - L46- and rear right fog light bulb - L47-
♦ Number plate light - X-
♦ Front left turn signal bulb - M5- and rear left turn signal bulb -
M6-
♦ Front right turn signal bulb - M7- and rear right turn signal bulb
- M8-
♦ Remove luggage compartment light - W3- and footwell light.
♦ Ignition/starter switch - D-
♦ Light switch - E1-
♦ Heated windscreen switch - E180-
♦ Switch and instrument illumination regulator - E20-

♦ Hazard warning lights button - E229- and indicator lamp for

hazard light warning system - K6-
♦ Heated rear window - Z1- and heated windscreen - Z2-
♦ Heated rear window button - E230- and indicator lamp for
heated rear window - K10-
♦ Heated rear window relay - J9-
♦ Relay for heated rear window - J47- and indicator lamp for
heated windscreen - K122-
♦ Rain and light sensor - G397-
♦ Entry and start authorisation control unit - J518- and entry and
start authorisation button - E408-
♦ On-board supply control unit - J519-
♦ Left daytime running light bulb - L174- and right daytime run‐
ning light bulb - L175-
♦ Front left side marker bulb - M33- and front right side marker
bulb - M34-
♦ Left static cornering light - M51- and right static cornering light
- M52-
♦ Motor for rear window wiper - V12- and windscreen wiper mo‐
tor on driver side - V216-
♦ Left spray jet heater element - Z20- and right spray jet heater
element - Z21- :
♦ Fuel pump relay - J17-
♦ Windscreen/rear window washer pump - V5- and relay for
headlight washer system - J39-
Adapting onboard supply control unit
The following functions of onboard supply control unit - J519- can
be adapted:
♦ Adapting turn signal cycles of lane change flash
♦ Adapting footwell light dimmer value
♦ Adapting Coming Home time
♦ Adapting Leaving Home time
♦ Coding wiper electronics/deactivating APP function
Note
It depends on the fitted optional equipment whether or not the

above-mentioned adaptations can be carried out.

2.2 Removing and installing data bus diag‐

nostic interface - J533-
Removing (LHD vehicles): ⇒ page 350
Installing (LHD vehicles): ⇒ page 351 .
Removing (RHD vehicles): ⇒ page 351 .
Installing (RHD vehicles): ⇒ page 351 .
Renewing data bus diagnostic interface: ⇒ page 351
Coding data bus diagnostic interface: ⇒ page 351
Checking bus activity: ⇒ page 351
Note

tions
The data bus diagnostic interface - J533- (gateway) is a separate
control unit and is located next to pedal bracket in footwell on
driver side. On RHD vehicles, it is located behind the glove com‐
partment on front passenger side. It is responsible for the follow‐
ing in the vehicle:
♦ Data exchange between “powertrain CAN data bus”, “conven‐
ience CAN data bus” and “infotainment CAN data bus”
♦ Conversion of diagnostic data from CAN data bus to K lead
and visa versa, so that data can be used by ⇒ Vehicle diag‐
nostic tester.
Note
If the data bus diagnostic interface - J533- is to be replaced, it is

essential that the procedure for replacing the “data bus diagnostic
interface -J533” is carried out, so that the codes stored in the unit
can be read ⇒ page 351 .

Removing (LHD vehicles):
– Remove cover in footwell on driver side ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing
and installing dash panel end trim on driver side .
– Remove left footwell vent ⇒ Heating, ventilation, air condi‐
tioning; Rep. gr. 87 ; Air duct; Removing and installing front
vent .


– Press securing pins -3- together -arrows- and pull out of se‐
curing holes.
– Remove data bus diagnostic interface - J533- -2- from vehicle.
Installing (LHD vehicles):
Removing (RHD vehicles):
Rep. gr. 68 ; Removing and installing glove compartment .
– Remove right footwell vent ⇒ Heating, ventilation, air condi‐
tioning; Rep. gr. 87 ; Air duct; Removing and installing front
vents .

– Press securing pins -3- together -arrows- and pull out of se‐
curing holes.
– Remove data bus diagnostic interface - J533- -2- from vehicle.
Installing (RHD vehicles):
Renewing data bus diagnostic interface
Coding data bus diagnostic interface
Checking bus activity
Using this test it is possible to check to see if the individual drive
buses (powertrain, convenience and infotainment) have changed
to the sleep mode.
2.3 Removing and installing convenience

system central control unit - J393-
Depending on equipment, the following control units are integra‐

ted into the convenience system central control unit - J393- :

♦ Immobiliser control unit - J362- or entry and start authorisation

tions
The convenience system central control unit - J393- is, depending
on equipment, responsible for the following in the vehicle:
♦ Control of the central locking system
♦ Activation of the rear door control unit
♦ Activation of the rear lid unlocking function
♦ Activation of the fuel filler flap unlocking function
♦ Activation of the sliding/tilting roof
♦ Activation of the anti-theft alarm (ATA), further information
⇒ page 314
♦ Activation of the immobiliser, further information ⇒ page 311
♦ Activation of the entry and start authorisation system, further
information ⇒ page 200
Note
♦ The procedure must always be carried out for reading the co‐
des stored in the “convenience system central control unit” if
the convenience system central control unit - J393- is to be
renewed ⇒ page 354 .
♦ After renewing the convenience system central control unit -
J393- , the convenience system central control unit's other
functions, such as “immobiliser”, “anti-theft alarm”, “entry and
start authorisation”, “tyre pressure monitor” and the central
locking system keys must also be adapted depending on
equipment.
♦ Start by adapting the immobiliser ( ⇒ page 311 ) and continue,
in any sequence, with the further functions of the convenience
After renewing the convenience system central control unit -

J393- , the anti-theft alarm must be adapted ⇒ page 351 .
Removing:
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing and installing
glove compartment .

– Unscrew both securing nuts -1- and remove convenience sys‐

tem central control unit - J393- with bracket -2- from securing
threads, taking connected wiring length into consideration.
Note
The connectors can only be released and disconnected once the

recesses of the connector and bracket are aligned with each other
precisely.
– Release locking lug -3- and push convenience system central

control unit - J393- into bracket in -direction of arrow- until re‐
cesses on connector -1- are exactly positioned over recesses
-2- in bracket.
– Pull all connectors off central control unit for convenience sys‐
tem - J393- .
Note
♦ The number of connectors depends on the vehicle equipment

level.
♦ All connectors can only be fitted in one position and do not
therefore have to be marked.
– Open the four catches at the sides -arrows- and remove cover
-1-.
– Remove convenience system central control unit - J393- -2-
from bracket.
Installing:
Note
The connectors can only be fitted and locked in place once the
recesses of the connector -1- and the bracket -2- are positioned
over one another precisely.

– Tighten securing nuts -1- to specified torque of 4.5 Nm.

Renewing and/or coding convenience system central control unit
Note
♦ After renewing the convenience system central control unit -

J393- , the convenience system central control unit's other
functions, such as “immobiliser”, “anti-theft alarm”, “entry and
start authorisation”, “tyre pressure monitor” and the central
locking system keys must also be adapted depending on
equipment.
♦ Start by adapting the immobiliser ( ⇒ page 311 ) and continue,
in any sequence, with the further functions of the convenience
Adapting convenience system central control unit

The following functions in the convenience system central control
unit - J393- can be adapted:
♦ Reading alarm sources of anti-theft alarm
♦ Reading alarm sources of alarm horn
♦ Adapting automatic unlocking on removing ignition key
♦ Adapting automatic locking at 15 km/h
♦ Adapting battery monitoring
♦ Adapting ATA delay on opening driver door
♦ Adapting unlocking of individual doors
♦ Adapting sensitivity of interior monitoring system
♦ Adapting sensitivity of inclination sensor
♦ Deactivating factory mode
♦ Adapting convenience operation via remote control
♦ Adapting country setting for intelligent alarm horn
♦ Reading measured values of convenience system
♦ Adapting feedback indicating that anti-theft alarm system is
armed
♦ Adapting feedback for unlocking and locking via remote con‐
trol
♦ Adapting feedback for unlocking and locking via key
♦ Adapting feedback for unlocking and locking via access and
start authorisation system
♦ Adapting remote control key
♦ Checking remote control key
♦ Adapting software of convenience system central control unit
♦ Updating convenience system central control unit
♦ Remote activation or deactivation of rear lid opening

Note
It depends on the fitted optional equipment whether or not the

above-mentioned adaptations can be carried out.

3 Connectors
⇒ “3.1 Repairing electrical wiring harnesses and plug-in connec‐
tions”, page 356
3.1 Repairing electrical wiring harnesses

and plug-in connections
Repairing wiring harnesses and connectors ⇒ Electrical System,
General Information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Connectors; Repairing wiring
harnesses and connectors .

4 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and infor‐

mation systems
⇒ Electrical System, General Information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle
diagnostic, testing and information systems .
4. Vehicle diagnosis, testing and information systems 357

VW Passat b7 Electrical System Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VW Passat b7 Electrical System Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VW Passat b7 Electrical System Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

Service Department. Technical Information

92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

1.5 Renewing windscreen wiper rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

2.4 Adjusting fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

27 – Starter, current supply, CCS

1.1 Assembly overview - battery

Depending on the level of equipment or the market, the starter

2 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

1 - Earth wire battery terminal

1.2 Assembly overview - pyrotechnic bat‐

If the battery isolator has triggered, the pyrotechnical battery iso‐

1.3 Disconnecting and connecting battery

♦ Depending on the level of equipment or the market, the starter

1.3.1 Disconnecting and connecting battery,

Danger of injury! Comply with the warning notices and safety

Special tools and workshop equipment required

4 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

♦ Disconnecting the battery involves deactivating the anti-theft

– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.

– Open cover -1- of battery protective jacket.

All the instructions and information for battery terminal con‐

6 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

– Fit positive cable battery terminal clamp onto battery positive

– Finally, when window is

– Check convenience mode

1.3.2 Disconnecting and connecting battery,

Danger of injury! Comply with the warning notices and safety

Special tools and workshop equipment required

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1331-

♦ Disconnecting the battery involves deactivating the anti-theft

– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.

All the instructions and information for battery terminal con‐

Positive wire battery clamp must be turned in direction of travel.

8 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

– Fit positive cable battery terminal clamp onto battery positive

– Finally, when window is

– Check convenience mode

1.4 Removing and installing battery

1.4.1 Removing and installing battery, in en‐

Danger of injury! Comply with the warning notices and safety

All the instructions and information for battery terminal con‐

Special tools and workshop equipment required

Replacing battery on vehicles with start/stop system:

♦ The battery parametrisation must be performed after installing

10 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS

– Depending on equipment, pull either panel of battery housing

– Unscrew securing bolt -1- and remove clamping plate -2-.

– Fold handles -arrows- upwards and remove battery.

A loosely fitted battery creates the following dangers:

Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing ob‐

1.4.2 Removing and installing battery, in en‐

Danger of injury! Comply with the warning notices and safety

All the instructions and information for battery terminal con‐

Special tools and workshop equipment required

♦ Pliers for spring-type clips - VAS 5024A-